canon hv20 e (ipal) parts list, service manual

No.D16-2016, D16-2015 Digital Video Camera

HV20 EHV20 E

CANON INC. 2007c

Canon Inc.Digital Imaging Products Service

& Quality Assurance Dept.First Edition : Mar. 2007

First Print : Mar. 2007

R2:CONFIDENTIAL

Video Product

iPAL

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

CONTENTS

1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 Development Concept ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2 Product Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21-3 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

2. Performance --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93. System Diagram -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27

HV20 EGENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1

1. Product Overview

1-1 Development Concept

Full-spec HD camera system

CanonHD CMOS

DIGIC DV IIHD video lens

Superior technology that supports HDwith its high image quality

Hi-speed AF(Instant AF)Super-range OIS

A horizontal stylish design and elegantly simple operational feel

Advancedaccessory shoe

Audio functionsHDMIincorporated

A fuller array of functions

Easy to carry around, uncomplicated and easy to use

HDMI incorporated

Straightforward connection involvingthe hookup of one cable

Advanced accessory shoe & audio functions featured*Advanced accessory shoe featured Video light, flash unit and directional microphone supported*A fuller range of audio functions Manual VR, level meter and headphones supported

Elegantly simple operation achieved by a horizontal stylish design*Elegantly simple operation Zoom/trigger key (LCD panel), joystick (rear panel) and dedicated focusing dial provided*Shooting for extended periods of time Actual shooting of a whole tape (60 minutes) enabled by new high-capacity battery

And for good measure, there’s also the HDV (PF25) setting and cinema mode setting... See technical description*Cinema mode that users will find easy to use

(Perfect for the more mature users who used to take 8 mm movies years ago!)

Stylish design and elegantly simple operation. The full-spec HD camcorder.Stylish design and elegantly simple operation. The full-spec HD camcorder.

How the HV20 E has evolved from the HV10 E


2

1-2 Product Specifications

Specifications HV20 E

Image sensing device 1/2.7-inch CMOS sensor, RGB primary color filter

Total pixels Approx. 2.96 million

Movie effective pixels Approx. 2.07 million

(HD/DV widescreen)

Still image effective pixels Approx. 2.76 million

(4:3)

Optical zoom magnification 10×

AF Hi-Speed AF (INSTANT AF)

Digital zoom 40/200× for tapes (No magnification when cards are used)

Image stabilizer Optical image stabilizer (shift type), Super range support

LCD monitor 2.7-inch wide-screen LCD with approx. 211,000 pixels and AR coating

EVF 0.27-inch, 123,000 pixel widescreen color viewfinder

Memory card miniSD

Still image recording size 2048 × 1536 (4:3), 1920 × 1080 (16:9), 1440 × 1080, 640 × 480

Still image recording Progressive photos (JPEG compression)

Movie recording ×

Compatible printers PictBridge-compliant printers only

Advanced shoe

CINE mode

New video recording standards [HDV (PF25)]

(Progressive Frame setting)

Still image file transfer USB only

Streaming IEEE 1394 (MPEG2TS/DV)

USB compatibility USB 2.0 FULL Speed PTP supported

Down-converting (Both analog and digital)

White LED Mini video light (high-brightness white LED included) (Light switch provided)

Built-in flash (Light guide flash)

Search Date search, END search

Terminals AV (AV mini terminal), HDV/DV, USB : Input/output

HDMI terminal/Component terminal : output only

Headphone terminal (also serves as AV mini terminal)/mic terminal

Analog → Digital conversion

AV → IEEE 1394

Battery included with unit BP-2L13


3

1-3 Function and Performance List

Item HV20 E

Camera

Image Image size 1/2.7 model

sensing System (Filter) RGB primary color filter

device Total pixels Approx. 2.96 million (1994 [H] × 1484 [V])

(CMOS) Number of effective pixels Tape In HDV/DV wide mode : Approx. 2.07 million (1920 [H] × 1080 [V])

In DV normal mode : Approx. 1.55 million (1440 [H] × 1080[V])

Card 4:3 : Approx. 2.76 million (1920 [H] × 1440 [V])

Lens Nominal focal length 6.1 - 61mm

Optical zoom magnification 10×

Digital zoom Magnifi Tape 40×/200×

magnification -cation Card None

System Tape Memory readout

Card ---

f/number f/1.8 - 3.0 when tapes are used, f/2.8 - 3.0 when cards are used

Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) 2 leaves

Zoom speed Continuously varying speed

Filter diameter 43mm P0.75

Noise reduction Camera Tape Either NR or Y/C-NR

Card Movie None

Still image Chroma-only, median filter

Recorder C-NR system

Minimum Auto mode 2.5 lx

illumination (with auto slow shutter selected)

Night mode 0.2 lx

Image stabilizer Image stabilization system Optical system (lens shift)

Sensing method Angle detection and sensor-based movement vector detection (super

range supported)

Shooting functions

AE mode Program AE AUTO, [P], (P, Av, Tv, CINE, SCN (Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach,

Sunset, Spotlight, Fireworks))

CINE mode is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode.

Metering system Tape Center-weighted AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night

average metering

Evaluative metering SCN (Snow, Beach, Spotlight, Sunset)

(128 segments)

No metering Fireworks

Card Evaluative metering AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset,

(128 segments) Spotlight, Fireworks

No metering Fireworks

Metering options Av, Tv, P mode

(Selectable from evaluative metering, center-weighted average meter-

ing, and spot metering)

AF frame linkage Not possible


4

Item HV20 E

Shooting functions

Exposure AE lock Included.

Operated using joystick (prohibited during AUTO and fireworks mode)

AE shift None (However, the custom brightness adjustment in the image effects

can be made)

Exposure compensation Supported.

± compensation is possible by moving the joystick (±11 steps).

Gain setting/Higher sensitivity AUTO

Backlight correction (BLC button)

Shutter speed Shutter speed setting Tape 9 levels

(in Tv mode) (1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.)

* : Display shows 1/12

(excluding when HDV (PF25) mode is set)

Card 9 levels (1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5 *, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500 sec.)

* : Display shows 1/12

AUTO Tape 1/50 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter OFF),

1/25 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter ON)

(excluding when HDV (PF25) mode is set)

Card 1/25 to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter OFF),

1/12.5* to 1/500sec. (with auto slow shutter ON)

* : Display is 1/12

Night 1/2 to 1/500sec. (Tape/Card)

Aperture value F1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0

(aperture value settings in Av mode : in tape camera mode) (Card recording : F2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0)

Auxiliary light Flash Built-in

Video light (external) Support

Mini video light Built-in (when flash is used, red eye reduction function is provided;

(high-brightness white LED included) low-luminance AF auxiliary light; manual on switch is provided)

Image quality Image effects functions (Vivid, Neutral, Low Sharpening, Soft Skin Detail)

adjustment Custom functions (Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness, Color Depth)

White balance Auto

Preset Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Fluorescent H

System TTL, 128 segments

Focus Mode AF(Hi-Speed/Normal )/MF, forced infinity

MF operation Operated by rotating the dial

Range-finding frame display Tape None

Card Available, Ai, AF (9-point focusing frame) and center selectable

Assist functions Available (enlargement, peaking)

Zoom Speed Supports variable speed (15 steps), selectable from Variable speed,

SPEED3, SPEED2, and SPEED1.

Digital effects Movie Auto fade, Wipe, Black & White, Sepia, Art

Still image Black & White, Sepia

Card Mix None

Multi-screen None

Movie shooting Tape miniDV

Card Not supported


5

Item HV20 E

Shooting functions

Still image Recording system Progressive photo

recording Single shooting

(Still images Continuous shooting Normal continuous shooting and high-speed continuous shooting can

cannot be be set.

recorded to tape) AEB Exposure compensation amount (steps of ±0, -0.5, +0.5)

Photo button Form Dedicated still image button

Pressed halfway down Included

Recorded image size L (2048 × 1536), LW (1920 × 1080), M (1440 × 1080), S (640 × 480),

SW (848 × 480)

Image quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal

External flash support (VFL-1), EOS flash unit not supported

Frame processing

Negative-positive reversal ×

Zebra pattern

Color bar ×

Self-timer 10 sec./Remote controller : 2sec.

Interval timer ×

Clear scan ×

Memory card miniSD memory card only

REC search ×

REC review

Standby switch ×

Quick Start ×

Power saving function Power shutoff (when battery pack installed)

(after recording has been continuously paused for 5 minutes)

Displayed text recording ×

Audio Tape DV recording 16-bit 2 channels (48kHz) or 12-bit 4 channels (32kHz) : 4-channel syn-

chronous recording not possible

HDV recording MPEG-1 Audio Layer II : 4-channel synchronous recording not possible

Card ×

Wind screen AUTO or OFF (selected on a menu)

EVF Size 0.27-inch (wide-screen color LCD RGB delta arrangement)

Pixels Approx. 123.000 pixels

Brightness adjustment ×

Color adjustment ×

Movable ×

LCD monitor Screen size 2.7-inch wide-screen color LCD

Pixels Approx. 211.000 pixels

Brightness adjustment

Backlight switching (When the battery pack installed: Normal/Bright switching)

“Bright” is the default setting when the CA-570 is connected.

Movable Mirror shooting supported


6

Item HV20 E

VCR

Playback system Frame playback DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward only

Slow playback (±1/3× speed) DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward only

2× speed playback DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : none

1× speed playback DV recording : Forward/Reverse, HDV recording : Forward/Reverse

Cue/Review DV recording : 9.5× speed, HDV recording : 8× speed

Search Photo search ×

Date search

Index search ×

End search

Playback effects Playback zoom (5× zoom) (In tape playback and card still image playback)

D. EFFECT Tape Auto fade, Wipe, Black & White, Sepia, Art

Card ×

Multi-screen ×

Data code display Date, Time, Date and time, Camera data display, Histogram (in still

image mode)

Card Slide show

Playback frame jump (10 or 100 shots/page jumping (with indexing))

Audio dubbing ×

AV insert ×

Zero set memory

Editing functions Simple editing ×

Special effects ×


7

Item HV20 E

System

Interface External microphone terminal

(terminals) Headphone terminal (AV mini-terminal)

HDV/DV terminal (Input/Output switching)

S-Video jack ×

AV mini-terminal AV mini-terminal, used for both input and output

Editing terminal (LANC terminal) ×

Component terminals Output only

HDMI terminal Output only

USB terminal (mini-B Receptacle) (USB 2.0 Full Speed)

Memory card file transfer (USB file transfer only)

Analog to digital signal conversion (HDV/DV terminal)

Direct Print (only PictBridge-compatible printers such as PIXUS 80i, iP8600)

Print/Share button

My Camera ×

Microphone attenuation

Microphone level meter

World clock (Date display (Japanese, North American, or European style can be

selected))

Text titles ×

Speaker

Alerting tone

Tally lamp ×

Remote control sensor (WL-D87)

Accessory shoe Advanced accessory shoe (EOS flash unit not supported)

Video ID

Illuminated key ×

Custom key ×

Night mode key ×

DV control ×

Internal battery charging (CA-570)

Backup power supply Built-in (rechargeable lithium battery)

Battery pack power NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L13 and BP-2L14 lithium ion batteries


8

External View

Fig. 1

138mm 88mm

80mm


9

2. Performance1 Type VCR-integrated camera2 Recording system Two rotating heads, helical scan azimuth recording

2-1 Video recording standardsHDV HDV1080i (1080/50i)

(Compression method : MPEG-2 Video [MP@ H-14])[50i recording also in the HDV (PF25) mode]

DV DV standards (consumer VCR, SD specifications)(Digital component recording)

Video signals Compliant with PAL system, 1080/50iQuantized bits 8 bits

2-2 Audio signal recording

2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot system2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm/sec. (HDV/DV : in SP mode)

Approx. 12.57mm/sec. (HDV/DV : in LP mode)2-5 Head drum

Drum diameter 21.7mmRpms 9000 rotations/minuteHeads Video heads : 2

DV PCM digital recording

(48kHz 16-bit recording or 32kHz 12-bit recording selectable)

(4-channel synchronous recording not possible)

HDV MPEG-1 Audio Layer II

(Sampling frequency : 48kHz 16-bit recording; bit rate : 384kbps)

(4-channel synchronous recording not possible)


10

3 Recording/playback time Max. 80 minutes (HDV/DV : in SP mode)Max. 120 minutes (DV : in LP mode)

Continuous battery shooting time/Actual shooting time, Continuous playback time“Normal” in *1 refers to the LCD brightness at the Normal setting, and “Bright” in *2 refers to the LCD brightness at the Bright setting.The times listed in the table below are approximations only.

In HDV recording mode

In DV recording mode

4 Compatible cassette tape Mini DVC specs4-1 Tape type Vapor-deposited metal tape4-2 Tape width 6.35mm4-3 Tape thickness 7µm or 5.3µm

When viewfinder is used When LCD monitor is used

Continuous Actual Continuous shooting Actual shooting Continuous playback

shooting shooting

NB-2L 55min 30min 55min (Normal*1) 30min (Normal) 70min (Normal)

50min (Bright*2) 30min (Bright)

NB-2LH 70min 40min 65min (Normal) 35min (Normal) 85min (Normal)

65min (Bright) 35min (Bright)

BP-2L12 120min 70min 110min (Normal) 65min (Normal) 140min (Normal)






When viewfinder is used When LCD monitor is used

Continuous Actual Continuous shooting Actual shooting Continuous playback

shooting shooting

NB-2L 65min 35min 60min (Normal*1) 35min (Normal) 75min (Normal)

55min (Bright*2) 30min (Bright)

NB-2LH 80min 45min 75min (Normal) 45min (Normal) 95min (Normal)









11

5 Camera5-1 Image sensing device 1/2.7-inch CMOS image sensor

5-1-1 Pixels Total pixels Approx. 2.96 million (1994 [H] × 1484 [V])5-1-2 Number of effective pixels

5-1-3 Filter RGB primary color filter5-1-4 Signal configuration Compliant with PAL system, 1080/50i5-1-5 Scanning system Progressive5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination

Auto mode Approx.2.5 lx (shutter speed 1/25sec.)(with auto slow shutter ON)

Night mode Approx.0.2 lx (shutter speed 1/2sec.)5-1-7 Subject illumination range Approx.0.2 lx to 100,000 lx

5-2 Photo lens5-2-1 Nominal focal length 6.1 - 61mm

Zoom magnification(with tape/with card) Optical 10× zoom

35mm film equivalent value

5-2-2 Nominal diameteric ratio 1.8-3.0 ... In tape mode5-2-3 Lens configuration 11 elements in 9 groups, using two aspherical surfaces (two aspherical lenses)5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type. Manually adjustable (by operating focus button)5-2-5 Minimum object distance 10mm (AF linked; wide end), 1m for full zoom area (from lens tip)5-2-6 Power zoom Variable (15-step) power zoom. Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by moving

slide lever. Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring).Zoom speed Selectable from Variable Speed, SPEED3, SPEED2, SPEED1.

Maximum speed at variable speed (W <=> T) : Approx. 1.3sec. at PAUSE, approx. 2.3sec.during RECMinimum speed at variable speed (W <=> T) : Approx. 37sec. during PAUSE/RECApprox. 4.5sec. at SPEED3, approx. 8.7sec. at SPEED2, and approx. 16.2sec. at SPEED1

5-2-7 Focal length display None. Includes simple zoom display in viewfinder/LCD monitor.5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide end macro

Macro shooting distance 10mm (from lens front)5-2-9 Filter diameter 43mm P0.755-2-10 Accessory lens, filter The following can be used : WD-H43 (× 0.7), TL-H43 (× 1.7), FS-43U/FS-43U II5-2-11 Lens hood None5-2-12 Lens cap Built-in type (electrically opened and closed)

5-3 Digital zoom

5-4 Image stabilization function Included (supported in both tape and card modes)Image stabilization system Optical system (lens shift)Camera shake detection system Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor) and super range by sensor-based

movement vector detection supported. Forcibly set to ON in AUTO mode.

Card recording Tape recording

4:3 mode 16:9 mode DV (Normal) mode HD/DV (Wide) mode

Approx. 2.76 million Approx. 2.07 million Approx. 1.55 million Approx. 2.07 million

1920 (H) × 1440 (V) 1920 (H) × 1080 (V) 1440 (H) × 1080 (V) 1920 (H) × 1080 (V)


4:3 mode 16:9 mode DV (Normal) mode HD/DV (Wide) mode

Approx. 40.0 - 400mm Approx. 43.6 - 436mm Approx. 53 - 530mm Approx. 43.6 - 436mm


Magnification Magnification

No function Up to 40/200 ×


12

5-5 Shooting modesTape mode Movies compliant with the HDV/DV standard are recorded on miniDV cassettes (still images

cannot be recorded on tapes). In addition, when a miniSD memory card is installed, still imagesare recorded on the memory card while movies are recorded on the tape. However, still imagescannot be shot when line signals are input. (Refer to the memory card system.)

Card mode Still images (JPEG compression) are recorded on a miniSD memory card (refer to memory cardsystem).Movie recording on a card is not available.

5-6 Exposure control5-6-1 Program AE AUTO, P ( P, Tv, Av, CINE*), SCN (Portrait, Sports, Night, Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight,

Fireworks)* The CINE mode is effective only while the camera is in the tape camera mode. Here, the

program AE mode is automatically set when the user has switched the camera over to the cardmode while the cinema mode was set in the tape mode.

5-6-2 Metering systemTape recording Center-weighted average : AUTO, P, Av, Tv, CINE, Portrait, Sports, Night

128-segment evaluative metering (16H × 8V) : Snow, Beach, Sunset modes, and Spotlight No metering : SCN (Fireworks)...(Fixed exposure: 1/50)

Card recording 128-segment evaluative metering (16H × 8V) : AUTO, P, Av, Tv, Portrait, Sports, Night,Snow, Beach, Sunset, Spotlight

No metering : SCN (Fireworks)...Fixed exposure : 2sec. Selectable from 128-segment evaluative metering, center-weighted average metering, and spot

metering : Av, Tv, and P (evaluative metering is the default for theses).5-6-3 Exposure compensation function

Exposure lock Exposure locked by moving the joystick. After the exposure is locked, it can be corrected bymoving the joystick (except in the AUTO, Fireworks mode)

Exposure compensation amount ±11 levels (-11 to ±0 to +11, ±2.75EV) Indicated as number in the viewfinder (±0 to ±11).Back light correction Function initiated by operating the BLC (Backlight Correction) button to prevent the main sub-

ject from appearing too dark when it is shot with a high-brightness subject (such as the sun) inthe background.

5-6-4 Electronic shutter5-6-4-1 AUTO mode

HDV/DV mode Tape : 1/25 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON)1/50 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter OFF)

Card : 1/12.5* to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON) * : Displayed as 1/12sec.1/25 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter OFF)

HDV (PF25) mode 1/25 to 1/500sec.(With auto slow shutter OFF)1/12 to 1/500sec. (With auto slow shutter ON)

5-6-4-2 Av modeAperture setting Tape : f/1.8, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.0

Card : f/2.8, 3.4, 4.0, 4.8, 5.6, 6.7, 8.05-6-4-3 Tv mode

Shutter setting Tape recording : 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000sec. (HDV/DVmode) *Displayed as 1/121/6, 1/12, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000sec. (HDV (PF25)mode)

Card recording : 1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12.5*, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500sec. *Displayed as 1/125-6-4-4 Night mode Both Tape and Card : 1/2 to 1/500sec.5-6-4-5 Other modes P, Sports, Snow, Beach, Sunset mode

HDV/DV mode : same as Auto Slow Shutter Off in AUTO mode.HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/500sec.

Portrait : Tape : HDV/DV mode : 1/50 to 1/1000sec.HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/1000sec.

: Card : 1/25 to 1/500sec. Spotlight : Tape : HDV/DV mode : 1/50sec.

HDV (PF25) mode : 1/25 to 1/50sec.: Card : 1/25 to 1/100sec.

Fireworks : Tape : Tape, 1/50sec. only: Card : 2sec. only


13

5-7 AF5-7-1 System Hybrid AF (TTL-video signal detection system and external phase difference metering system)

and Normal AF (TTL-video signal detection system) selectable (MENU settings).Setting possible for card or tape.The hybrid AF is referred to as Hi-Speed AF for the DOM models and Instant AF for the overseasmodels.

5-7-2 AF range finding areaIn tape mode Screen centerIn card mode Selection of Ai (artificial intelligence) AF function where the camera Automatically selects from

9 range-finding frames on the screen, the screen center function where the range-finding is fixedat the center frame or OFF possible (9-point range-finding selection AF not possible)Only AiAF in AUTO mode.

5-7-3 Range-finding frame displayIn Tape mode NoneIn Card mode Appears. AF frame designated for focusing (fixed at center or AF frame selected by AiAF lights

up green).The AF frame appears yellow when the subject cannot be brought into focus or for Tv mode andNight mode with a shutter speed of 1/2 second or more to less than 1/6 second.

5-7-4 AF operating range 10mm to infinity (at wide end); 1m to infinity in full zoom area (from lens front)5-7-5 AF operation illumination range Approx. 50 lx to 100,000 lx5-7-6 AF mode switching Switching between continuous AF and manual focusing enabled by operating the focus button.

Operation is not possible in the Auto mode.During manual focus, the [MF] indicator appears in the viewfinder. MF adjustments are per-formed by rotating the dial.Switching between INSTANT AF and normal AF enabled by a menu setting.Even in INSTANT AF mode, the control exercised during actual recording differs from RECpause/no tape mode. In REC pause/no tape mode, AF control which gives priority to the re-sponse characteristics is exercised to enable the focusing status to be achieved instantly.During actual recording, on the other hand, AF control which gives priority to stability andnatural focusing is exercised to enable the subjects that in an instant cut across the width oflength of the screen, for instance, to be focused. In addition, a focusing sound is heard when theAC adapter is connected in no tape mode.

5-7-7 Forced infinity setting Holding down the Focus button (approx. 2 seconds or more) sets to Infinity and displays [ ] inthe viewfinder.

5-7-8 Focus assist Provided; The function enlarges the image displayed on the LCD (it is approximately doubled insize) or it emphasis the image’s outlines (peaking) to facilitate the focusing process when thefocus assist button is operated during manual focusing.The function is released under the following conditions : When recording is started, when recreview is initiated, when the MENU or FUNC. menu is opened, when zooming, when switchingbetween tape and card mode, when the power supply is switched on or off.

5-8 Viewfinder 0.27-inch wide-screen color LCD (approx. 123,000 pixels)ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing inwards) and during mirror shooting

5-8-1 Rotation Not possible5-8-2 Detaching eyepiece Not possible5-8-3 Diopter movement range +1.5 to -5.5 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)5-8-4 Lens configuration 1-lens configuration


14

5-9 LCD panel 2.7-inch wide-screen color LCD (approx. 210,000 pixels)TFT active-matrix drive. RGB delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (whenpanel faces outwards)

5-9-1 Angle adjustment Possible; Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting.5-9-2 Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining

tape, time code, warnings and other indications.17 languages supported German, English, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish, Rumanian, Turkish, Russian, Ukrainian, Ara-

bic, Persian, Thai, Chinese (simplified), Chinese (traditional), Korean, Japanese. A limited num-ber of indicators are displayed during mirror shooting.

5-9-3 Backlight adjustment Enabled by holding down DISP. button (for about 2 seconds). The setting switches between“Bright” to “Normal” each time the button is pressed. The default setting during battery opera-tion is “Normal”. The default setting during compact power adapter (CA) operation is “Bright”.If the power supply is switched from battery operation to CA operation while the power is on, thesetting made during CA operation is used (CA operation default setting is used if no setting wasmade). In the same way, if the power supply is switched from CA operation to battery operationwhile the power is on, the setting made during battery operation is used (battery operation de-fault setting is used if no setting was made).

5-9-4 Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder

*1 : When taking self-portraits (using the mirror), only the self-timer display is enlarged and displayed.5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Auto/Set/Preset. Six presets are avail-

able :Daylight : 5,400K; Shade : 8,000-8,500K;Cloudy : 6,000K;Tungsten (incandescent lamps and halogen bulbs) : 3,000K;Fluorescent H (3-wavelength type fluorescent) : 6,500K;Fluorescent (white fluorescent) : 4,000K.Presets are not possible in SNC and AUTO modes.

Adjustment range 2,800K to 8,000K5-11 Digital effects function

5-11-1 Fader [F] Audio Synchronized Fader, [F1] : auto fade (domestic models: fade to white; overseas models :fade to black), [F2] : wipe

Fade time Approx. 4sec.5-11-2 Effects [E] [E1] : Black & White; [E2] : Sepia; [E3] : Art

(While recording on a card, only effects [E1] (black & white) and [E2] (sepia) are available.)Effect function is turned ON and OFF by operating the joystick.

5-11-3 Multi-screen No function5-11-4 Card Mix No function

5-12 Built-in microphone Stereo (using electret condenser microphone)Wind screen function Included. With AUTO/OFF switch (Menu selection. Available for built-in microphone only.)

5-13 Built-in flash Pre-flash light adjustment system5-13-1 Flash mode Auto flash, auto flash with Red-eye Reduction, manual flash, flash off5-13-2 Shutter speed Flash on : Firing at 1/500sec. or less in card camera mode5-13-3 Shooting distance W-end : Approx.50cm to 2.8m. T-end : Approx.to 2.7m. Approx. 1 to 2m in the instruction

manual5-14 Auxiliary light source Includes mini video light (equipped with high-brightness white LED) with light button.

Enables shooting at distances of approx. 1.5m in AUTO mode.Firing initiated by operating the light button.

Lighting mode The AF auxiliary light is set to Auto when the light button is pressed, still image camera AFauxiliary light AUTO is selected and when the Red-eye Reduction function is selected. The AFauxiliary light is OFF in Fireworks mode.

Camera/Camera Card mode VCR/Card Playback mode

LCD panel Viewfinder LCD panel Viewfinder

Panel closed (panel facing inwards) OFF ON OFF ON

Panel closed (panel facing outwards) ON OFF ON OFF

Panel open ON OFF ON OFF

Mirror shooting *1 ON ON ON OFF


15

5-15 Other additional functions5-15-1 Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 23:59:59:24) and records in sub-code area. If different re-

cording modes (HDV and DV) are used in one recording session, the timecode will not be con-tinued between the modes.

5-15-2 Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be dis-played during playback.

Date and time Automatic calendar range : January 1, 2007, through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting isJanuary 1, 2007)The date/time display (year/month/day) can be selected from Japanese, American, and Europeanstyles.World clock support (Select the name of your destination city and the date and time are auto-matically adjusted to the local date and time. Supports daylight saving time.)During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, ortime only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990, through December 31, 2089.)Dates and times cannot be displayed concurrently with the camera data.

Camera data Tape recording Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded, and can be displayed during play-back.

Card recording The following information can be displayed: shooting mode during shooting, pixel size, meter-ing, white balance, image quality effects, manual focusing (manual AF), flash information, filesize, exposure compensation value, f/number, shutter speed, etc. Only the items which supportself-recording are displayed.Information can be displayed or not displayed by operating the DISP. button.

5-15-3 Accessory shoe Advanced accessory shoe (EOS flash unit not supported)5-15-4 REC Search function No function5-15-5 Rec review function Supported; accessed by initiating the Recording Check operation (using the joystick) when cam-

era recording is paused; playback in the forward direction only.5-15-6 Zero set memory Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the

WL-D87 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During record-ing, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.)

5-15-7 Remote control reception ON/OFFPossible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (by selecting from menu).

5-15-8 Headphone volume adjustment Supported, Menu setting5-15-9 Widescreen shooting button Not available (the wide/normal setting for DV provided as a menu item)5-15-10 AEB shooting In Card Camera mode, the exposure compensation is automatically changed and recorded in ±0

steps, -0.5 steps or +0.5 steps (when continuous shooting mode : AEB is selected). Flashshooting is not possible.

5-15-11 Still image check time setting After pressing the photo button to cancel operation, the display time can be set for checking thestill image.One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec.), 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 seconds can be selected as the setting mode.

5-15-12 Microphone attenuation Supported; 20dB attenuation applied to built-in microphone, 24dB attenuation applied exter-nally or to shoe microphone.

5-15-13 Microphone level meter Supported. (Joystick operation)5-15-14 Image effects setting The available image effect settings in the FUNC menu are “Vivid”, “Neutral”, “Low Sharpen-

ing”, “Soft Skin Detail” and “Custom.” These settings cannot be made in Special Scene mode.Vivid : Emphasizes contrast and color depth, and presents images with vibrant and

striking colors.Neutral : Limits the contrast and color depth, and presents pure images without any

enhancements.Low Sharpening : Provides image with less distinct outlines and a softer touch.Soft Skin Detail : Smoothes the outlines of skin sections, and presents skin sections with a

softer tone.Custom : Enables adjustment of the brightness, contrast, sharpness, and color depth.

5-15-15 Shooting assist Either of the two following displays can be set by a menu selection.a. Zebra Function for displaying a black-and-white zebra pattern on the high-brightness parts of the sub-

ject OFF, 100% or 70% selectableb. Peaking Function for emphasizing the image outlines and displaying the images with such outlines.

Neither function has any effect on the video recording.5-15-16 Marker displays Horizontal marker (white/gray) and grid (white/gray) displays (Menu selection).


16

6 Recorder section6-1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, HDV/DV input recording, analog input recording (AV

miniterminal)6-1-1 Recording standards DV/HDV standard (1080/50i)6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm/sec. (HDV/DV : SP mode)

Approx. 12.57mm/sec. (LP mode)6-1-3 HDV/DV input video recording Complies with IEEE 1394

Records video/audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.6-1-4 Analog input recording Analog video/audio signals are recorded using the AV mini-jack.6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording

HDV/DV terminal AV mini-terminal6-2 Audio Dubbing Recording Not possible6-3 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback

6-3-1 Standard PlaybackVideo Images recorded under the DV/HDV (1080i) standard (playback of tapes with 1080/30P or 1080/

25P recordings also possible)(Playback of tapes with HDV 720P recordings not possible)

AudioDV standard playback 16-bit : 48kHz, 44.1kHz, 32kHz sampling frequencies supported

12-bit : 32kHz sampling frequency supportedStereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (mix ratio can be adjusted at themenu screen)

HDV standard playback 2CH Supports MPEG-1 Audio Layer II4CH Supports MPEG-2 Audio Layer II (4-channel playback of tapes containing 4-channel re-cordings possible)

6-3-2 Superb Playback Plays video onlyDV recording and playback

a. Fast playback Approx. 11.5× speedb. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5× speedc. Frame playback Forward/reverse frame feedingd. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3× speede. 1× speed playback Forward/reverse 1× speedf. 2× speed playback Forward/reverse at 2× speed

HDV recording playbacka. Fast-forward playback Approx. 8× speedb. Rewind playback Approx. 8× speedc. Frame playback Forward only

(reverse frame playback is performed by tape rewinding ⇒ forward playback ⇒ still operation)d. Slow playback Forward only (approx. 1/3× speed) (Reverse slow playback is identical to reverse 1× playback.)e. 1× speed playback Forward/reverse 1× speed

6-4 Tape fast-forward/rewind Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape)6-5 Input signals

6-5-1 HDV/DV terminal Compliant with IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol6-5-2 AV mini-terminal φ3.5mm 4-pole mini-jack

a. Video signals PAL standard color video signalsImpedance 75ΩSignal level 1 Vp-p (composite)

b. Audio signalTypes of signals Stereo audio signalImpedance Min. 40kΩSignal level -10dBv

6-5-3 Microphone terminal φ3.5mm stereo mini-jackImpedance Min. 5kΩSignal level -57dBV (when using 600Ω microphone)

6-5-4 USB port mini-BSupports USB 2.0 Full Speed.


17

6-6 Output signals6-6-1 HDV/DV terminal Special 4-pin (IEEE 1394 compatible); Compliant with IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol6-6-2 AV mini-terminal φ3.5mm 4-pole mini-jack

a. Video signalsSignal configuration PAL standard color video signalsImpedance 75ΩSignal level 1 Vp-p (composite)Horizontal resolution Self recording/playback Max. 530 TV lines (screen center) Camera EE OUT Catalog value : Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)

b. Audio signalTypes of signals Stereo audio signalImpedance Max. 3kΩSignal level -10dBv (with 47kΩ load)Frequency characteristic 60Hz to 16kHz (range between 1kHz reference ±3dB)

6-6-3 Component terminals Special D terminalTypes of signals 1080i/576i supportedImpedance 75ΩOutput signal level Y : 1 Vp-p

PB /PR, CB/CR : ±350m Vp-pHorizontal resolution Self recording/playback Approx. 800 TV lines during HD (screen center),

Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center) Camera EE OUT Approx. 800 TV lines during HD (screen center),

Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center) Catalog value Approx. 800 TV lines during HD,

Approx. 530 TV lines during SD (screen center)6-6-4 HDMI terminal Type A (19 pins)

Types of signals Output of signals matching the display unit connected to the HV20 E (576i /576P/1080i formatssupported)

6-6-5 Headphone terminal φ3.5mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV mini-terminal)Impedance 47ΩOutput signal level -25dBV (with 16Ω load at maximum volume)

6-6-6 USB portUSB device class Supports USB 2.0 Full-Speed

PTP classCompatible computer systems Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series

Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBookPC operating system Windows : Windows 98 SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP

Macintosh : Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later


18

6-7 Memory card system6-7-1 Types of memory cards used MiniSD memory cards and memory cards supported6-7-2 Recordable image types Still images only (recorded with JPEG compression) (movies not possible)

The recording pixel size for each mode appears as shown below and can be selected from theFUNC. menu. In either case, super fine, fine or normal can be selected as the image quality.Operation must be paused during tape playback. Also, still image recording is not possible whenline signals are input.

6-7-3 File name and folder name Based on the DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) rules and still image (Exif 2.2) filemanagement specifications/DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications,the following names are assigned to recorded cards after initializing in the Initialize menu.

Card volume label CANON DV

xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File number, z : A to Z*1 : Comes from motion video file of same file No.DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy. JPGxxx : folder number; yyyy : file number

File number Internal management is performed based on folder number-file number.Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders(100 files to a folder).Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998.

Relationship between folder No. and file No.

Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are basically numbered to be greater than Direc-tory No. and File No. of files saved on Memory Cards.

Folder No. File No. Saved files

101 0101 0102 0103 ···· 0199 0200

102 0201 0202 0203 ···· 0299 0300

···

198 9801 9802 9803 ···· 9899 9900 Recording area of photographed image

200 0001 0002 0003 ···· 0099 0100

···

998 9801 9802 9803 ···· 9899 9900

Card/Camera In tape or camera mode In tape playback mode

LW (1920 × 1080) In HDV/DV (wide) mode In HDV playback mode

L (2048 × 1536) LW (1920 × 1080) LW (1920 × 1080)

M (1440 × 1080) SW (848 × 480)

S (640 × 480)

DV (Normal) DV (Wide) playback

M (1440 × 1080) SW (848 × 480)

S (640 × 480) DV (Normal) playback

S (640 × 480)

Types of files Compression system Folder name and file name

Still image (Exif 2.2) file JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG

PhotoStitch No function

ZoomBrowser JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG

DPOF file TEXT //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK

DPOF automatic transmission file TEXT //MISC/AUTXFER.MRK


19

6-7-4 Number of recorded images

* Up to 9999 displayed.* The given number of recorded images is for reference only. The number varies greatly depending on the subject and other

conditions when taking pictures.6-7-5 Card initialization Cards must be initialized in the camera body. Operation is not guaranteed with PC initialization

since problems can occur with some OS.Cards can be initialized in two ways, normal initialization and complete initialization.Normal initialization is used to initialize only the management area on the memory card.Since the data in the data region is not cleared, reading and writing the card data repeatedly tendsto slow down the card access speed. This slowdown in the access speed is restored by completeinitialization. All the data recorded on the card is erased by complete initialization so that thesecurity aspect is also enhanced.

6-7-6 Usable memory cardsminiSD memory card SanDisk : 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GB

Matsushita Electric : 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GBToshiba : 32MB, 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB, 2GBLexar : 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, 1GB(However, this does not mean that the operation of all these memory cards is guaranteed.)

MultiMediaCard Not supported6-7-7 Number of continuous shots and number of stored continuous shots

* The numbers of the stored continuous shots given are approximations only.The continuous shooting speed when using the built-in flash is as indicated above in both the Normal and High-speed continuousshooting modes, and the flash output is approx. 1/4 of the output level when single shots are taken. The number of imagesrecorded when using the flash is identical to the number of recordable images in the table above.

Still image Image Number of recorded images (approximate) Data size

Image size quality 16MB 32MB 64MB 128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB /image

LW S. Fine 9 20 40 90 175 350 710 1460 Approx. 1360KB

(1920 × 1080) Fine 14 30 65 135 265 525 1055 2190 Approx. 910KB

Normal 29 60 130 265 520 1040 2080 4385 Approx. 460KB

L S. Fine 6 10 25 60 115 235 470 955 Approx. 2060KB

(2048 × 1536) Fine 9 20 40 85 175 350 700 1425 Approx. 1380KB

Normal 19 40 85 180 350 700 1400 2925 Approx. 690KB

M S. Fine 10 25 55 120 235 470 940 1920 Approx. 1020KB

(1440 × 1080) Fine 15 40 85 180 350 700 1400 2925 Approx. 690KB

Normal 35 80 170 350 690 1370 2745 5585 Approx. 350KB

SW S. Fine 50 105 225 455 895 1775 3550 7680 Approx. 270KB

(848 × 480) Fine 70 155 320 650 1265 2515 5035 *10240 Approx. 190KB

Normal 145 310 640 1300 2535 5030 *10070 *20485 Approx. 90KB

S S. Fine 65 140 295 600 1170 2320 4645 *10240 Approx. 215KB

(640 × 480) Fine 95 205 425 865 1690 3355 6715 *15365 Approx. 149KB

Normal 175 375 770 1560 3045 6040 *12085 *30730 Approx. 82KB

Number of continuous shots recorded per secondMaximum number of

High-speed continuous Normal continuous shooting Built-in flash firing

shooting (shots/sec) (shots/sec) (frames per second)recordable shots

5 images 3 images 2.1 images 60 images


20

6-8 D. Effect playback function6-8-1 Fader [F] Audio synchronized fader. Same as in shooting mode, [F1] : auto fade (domestic models : fade to

white; overseas models : fade to black), [F2] : wipeFade time Approx. 4sec.

6-8-2 Effects [E] Same as in shooting mode. [E1] : Black & White; [E2] : Sepia; [E3] : ArtEffect function turned ON/OFF by moving the joystick.

6-8-3 Multi-screen No function6-8-4 Card Mix No function6-8-5 Availability in operation mode

6-9 Direct Print Connecting to a PictBridge-compatible ( ) printer using the IFC-300PCU interface cable in-

cluded with the video camera enables the still images recorded on memory cards to be easilyprinted out by means of control exercised from the video camera.

6-9-1 Printable images Only the still images which have been recorded on the miniSD memory cards.6-9-2 Print layout Single image (with borders, without borders), 2/4/8/9/16-image layout printing; subject to re-

strictions based on printer specifications and paper size.6-9-3 Trimming Possible6-9-4 Date printing Possible (depends on specifications of connected printer)6-9-5 Number of print copies Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets

DPOF printing : Max. 998 images, 1 to 99 each

Printer specifications CP specifications

BJ Photospecifications

only

BJ specifications+PictBridge

specifications

CP specifications+PictBridge

specifications

PictBridge specifications

only

Printing functions

Printer manufacturer

Suitable printer

When the printeris connected

Paper setting

Paper size

Paper type

Bordered/

Borderless

2/4/8/9/16

screen layout

Image optimization

Date printing

Trimming

×

(*1)

( )

( )

×

(*1)

×( )

( )

( )

(*1)

( )

( )

( )

Not supported Not supportedPictBridge specifications

PictBridge control PictBridge control PictBridge control



Canon Other manufacturer

( ) : The printer is supportedThe model names of supported printers are all Japanese model names.*1 : This depends on the printer specifications and paper size.

CP-10/100 CP-200/3002nd/220/330/400/500/600/710/510

BJ-895PD/535PD/F890PD, PIXUS450i/470PD/50i

PIXUS 990i/900PD/DS700/810

Printer specifications when connected to HV20 E

Playback (VCR/Tape) Card playback (VCR/Card)

Fader ×

Effects ×

Multi-screen No function

Card Mix No function


21

6-10 Other functions6-10-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism

When the recording mode is continued, recording is possible from Recording Pause, Stop mode,and power off. This does not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed. If the recordingmode is different in HDV recording and DV recording, connected recording is not possible (an“Invalid” recording section is inserted between the parts). The timecode is also not continuous.

6-10-2 Power automatic stop function When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 minutes. When the battery voltage falls below aspecified value.

6-10-3 DV conversion function During playback of HDV-recorded tapes, this function outputs video/audio down-converted tothe DV standards from the HDV/DV terminal. When “DV LOCKED” is set for “DV OUTPUT”on the “PLAY/OUT SETUP” menu, the down-converted DV signals of the video/audio duringHDV tape playback (including special playback) are output from the HDV/DV terminal. Thisfunction is enabled only when the “Playback Standards” setting is set to “AUTO” or “HDV”.The HDV/DV terminal output signals corresponding to the “Playback Standards” setting and“DV OUTPUT” setting are shown in the table below.

Related specifications DV Conversion is enabled for Tape VCR only. No menu display is shown for other modes.During playback with the DV terminal set to “DV”, no text will be output to the componentoutput video.The image output in the DV mode entirely consists of 60i images.During normal playback and still image playback, the system data undergoing DV conversionand output consists of the date, date and time, camera data.The system data output to the DV terminal during search playback consists of the date, and dateand time. During connection to the HDV/DV terminal, the “DV Conversion” settings cannot bechanged.

6-10-4 Searcha. Date search If there is more than one recording date, this function cues up to the position where the date

changes.Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date

Search with remote control Search Select); the search can be set for up to 10 images before orafter the current position.

b. End search When the END SEARCH key is pressed in VCR mode after completion of shooting, the tapemoves to the position where the shooting last ended, cues to the end of the shooting, and thenstops the tape. Furthermore, when an end search is being performed, the tape is played backstarting about 4 seconds before the end of the shooting, enabling the image immediately beforethe end to be checked. However, this function does not work when the tape has been removedafter shooting.

6-10-5 World clock display Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date andtime are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code.

6-10-6 Speaker Built-in, volume adjustment provided6-10-7 Battery charging function When the Canon Compact Power Adapter CA-570 is connected, the battery pack installed in the

battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes. The lampremains on when charging is complete.)One flash per second for a charge level of 0% to 50%, two flashes per second for a charge levelof 50% to 95% or it lights for a charge level of 95% or more.)

Charging time NB-2L : Approx.110min., NB-2LH : Approx.130min., BP-2L12 : Approx. 200min., BP-2L13 :Approx.200min, BP-2L14 : Approx.225min.

6-10-8 File transfera. USB file transfer Still images recorded on memory cards can be uploaded to a PC by connecting the supplied IFC-

300PCU interface cable between a USB terminal on the PC and the USB terminal of the camcorder.Also, still images can be downloaded from the PC to memory cards in the camcorder.

b. DV file transfer Not possible

“DV OUTPUT” setting Playback signal “Playback Standards” setting

AUTO HDV DV

DV HDV DV DV No output

DV DV No output DV

HDV/DV HDV HDV HDV No output

DV DV No output DV


22

6-10-9 Analog/digital conversion This function converts analog AV signals input to the AV mini-terminal into digital DV signals inreal-time and outputs the digital DV signals from the HDV/DV terminal. When an 8mm videoplayer or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using a AV cable and the camcorderis connected to a PC using a DV cable, 8mm tape or VHS tape playback images can be output tothe PC. (“ON” must be selected for the [AV ⇒ DV] VCR setting in the VCR menu screen.)

6-10-10 Playback zoom If the zoom lever is flipped to the Tele side during image playback from the tape or card (exceptfor movie), the image being played back can be enlarged up to 5 times its size. (The initial settingof the playback zoom switch is 2× playback zoom, and this can be changed to 1× to 5× using thezoom lever.) Playback zoom is cancelled by holding the zoom lever to the Wide side until theframe display no longer appears.Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by Joystick. (On theLCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and the direction in which the areacan be moved by the Joystick is indicated by / )

6-10-11 Print/Share (PRINT/SHARE) buttonSupported. This button lights up when the camcorder is connected to a PictBridge-compatibleprinter or a PC, and when the button is pressed, images are printed out by the printer or sent tothe PC.

6-10-12 Internal lithium battery Built-in. When the battery is not used for about three months, the power may be discharged andthe date and time settings will be cancelled. The date and time need to be reset after eitherconnecting a power supply or installing batteries and charging. It takes approximately 24 hoursfor a full charge.

6-10-13 Histogram display Function for displaying the graphs of the brightness information of the still images during cardcamera (when checking still images)/card playback

6-10-14 DISP. button Provided; function for switching the display information with each operationFor movie camera All information displayed ⇔ tape operation icons onlyFor movie playback All information displayed ⇒ data codes erased ⇒ only operation icons/time codes, etc. dis-

played ⇒ all information displayedFor still image camera All information displayed ⇔ no information displayedFor still image playback Switching between all information displayed ⇔ histogram/all information displayed except Exif

⇒ no information displayedGuide displays are shown regardless of the DISP. button.

6-10-15 Still image jump Function for jumping to subsequent still images in 10- or 100-frame increments and displayingthem. A function for jumping (in 6-frame increments) to the previous page or next page is pro-vided on the index screen.

6-10-16 HDV logo lamp None6-10-17 TV type setting Function for setting the video output in line with the TV type, whether wide-screen TV (16:9) or

normal-screen TV (4:3). This function cancels out the TV type setting established with DVinput. Operation cannot be performed while a HDMI connection is made.See (18) below for the video output specifications.


23

6-10-17 Terminal output specifications in each mode of HV20 E.The images which correspond to the display capabilities of the display unit are output from theHDMI terminal. The specifications of each output are given after the tables below.

*1: The TV type setting is canceled.

Camera

Mode/setting

HD/Still Image 16:9

Still Image 4:3

SD 4:3

SD16:9

ComponentOutput

D3 (1440 × 1080) Squeeze 16:9 Wide MPEG TS

D3 (1440 × 1080) SideBlack & squeeze SideBlack MPEG TS

D1 (SD) Normal 4:3 Normal SideBlack DV (SD)

D1 (SD) Squeeze Squeeze 16:9 Wide DV (SD) squeeze

AV Output EVF/LCD display 1394 Output

DV input

HD (*1)

SD16:9 Squeeze

(*1)

SD4:3

SD16:9 Letterbox

D3 (1440 × 1080) Squeeze 16:9 Wide

Input status

Input status

Input status

Input status

D1 (SD) Normal 4:3 Normal SideBlack

D1 (SD) Squeeze Squeeze 16:9 Wide

D1 (SD) LetterBox LetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack


24

: SD squeeze is set if 576i has been set on the menu.

: While the HDMI terminal is connected, the images are displayed in the wide mode.

Note : The component/AV output signals are shut down while the HDMI terminal is connected.

Analoginput

Mode/setting

SD4:3

SD16:9 Letterbox

1920 × 1080Single

Index Playback

4:3(1440 × 1080)

Single

SD16:9 Squeeze

ComponentOutput

SideBlack DV (SD)

16:9 Wide DV (SD) squeeze

AV Output EVF/LCD display 1394 Output

CardPlayback

D3 (1440 × 1080) MPEG TS

D3 (1440 × 1080) MPEG TS

Squeeze 16:9 Wide

Output stop Input status



DV (SD) LetterBoxLetterBox+SideBlack

SideBlackSqueeze

D3 (1440 × 1080) MPEG TS16:9 WideSqueeze

TapePlayback

HD

SD16:9 Squeeze

SD4:3

SD16:9 Letterbox

D3 (1440 × 1080) Squeeze 16:9 Wide MPEG TS

MPEG TS

D1 (SD) Normal 4:3 Normal DV (SD)SideBlack

D1 (SD) Squeeze DV (SD) SqueezeSqueeze 16:9 Wide

D1 LetterBox DV (SD) SqueezeLetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack

D1 (SD) LetterBox D1 (SD) LetterBoxLetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack

Forced D1 LetterBox LetterBox+SideBlack

For awidescreen

TV

For aNormal TV

For awidescreen

TV

For aNormal TV


25

6-10-18 Images output from the HDMI terminalThis table lists the priority sequence for the HV20 E output images corresponding to the display capabilities of the display unitconnected to the HV20 E. It is possible to check which images are currently being output using “Playback output settings” (camera/playback) on the menu.

(*2) : Down-conversion, (*3) : IP conversion after down-conversion, (*4) : IP conversion processingThe sound is delivered in one of the linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) output formats listed in the table below depending on themode of the HV20 E main unit

Related specifications1. When a receiver is connected to the HV20 E main unit using the HDMI terminal, the video output to the component/composite

terminals is forcibly shut down.2. The audio signals to the AV mini terminal are output all the time if that terminal has been connected.3. If a DVI monitor (for a PC) has been connected, RGB signals in the 576P format will be output, but no guarantees are made for

the connections or quality of the images displayed on the monitor.4. During an HMDI connection, the “TV type” and “Component output” menu settings are grayed out and rendered inoperable.5. When HDV/DV signals are input or the analog input mode is established, the HDMI output is forcibly shut down.6. In both the SD and HD modes, the sound can be selected by setting “Audio output” as with the LINE OUT output when a 4-

channel tape is played back.7. DVI signals will be output if the EDID of the unit connected to the HV20 E cannot be read, if the EDID which has been read has

been destroyed or if the output format cannot be determined for some other reason.8. When a copy-protected tape has been played back, the output signals of the HDMI terminal will be muted, and a warning will be

displayed.Neither will signals be output to the HDMI terminal when a “copy-disabled” tape on which digital broadcasts have been re-corded with analog input signals is played back.(At such times, the EVF/LCD will also be muted.)

9. Bilingual audio signals cannot be output to the HDMI terminal.The status settings can be checked using “Playback/output settings” on the menu screen.The output displays are given below with the PAL displays in parentheses.(1) When 1920 × 1080i signals are output, “1920 × 1080i” is displayed.(2) When 720 × 576i signals are output, “720 × 576i” is displayed.(3) When 720 × 576P signals are output, “720 × 576P” is displayed.(4) When DVI signals are output, “DVI” is displayed.(5) When no units have been connected or the output format has not been determined, “---------” is displayed.

6-11 Terminal6-11-1 HDV/DV terminal Special 4-pin (IEEE 1394 compatible); input and output6-11-2 HDMI terminal Type A (19 pins), output only6-11-3 AV mini-terminal φ3.5mm diameter, 4-pin mini jack, input/output6-11-4 External microphone input terminal

φ3.5mm stereo mini-jack6-11-5 Headphone terminal φ3.5mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV mini-terminal)6-11-6 Component terminals Special mini-D terminal : Only outputs which support the 1080i or 576i standard6-11-7 USB port Mini-B Receptacle, USB 2.0 Full-Speed compliant6-11-8 Memory card connection terminal

Special multi-pin6-11-9 Battery terminal Special 3-pin6-11-10 DC input terminal φ3.4mm jack

Camera body Output 1080i 480i/576i 480i/576i 480P/576P 480P/576P

mode (16:9) (4:3) (16:9) (4:3)

HD 1 2 (*2) 4 (*2) 3 (*3) 5(*3)

SD (wide) --- 1 3 2 (*4) 4 (*4)

SD (normal) --- 3 1 4 (*4) 2 (*4)

Print screen (HD) --- 1 (*2) 3 (*2) 2 (*3) 4 (*3)

Camera body mode Output

SD-12bit/32kHz-2ch/4ch 32kHz-16bit-2ch

SD-16bit/48kHz-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch

HD-48Hz-2ch/4ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch


26

7 Power7-1 Input power supply 7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN)7-2 Power consumption

HDV During recording approx. 4.3W (using CVF),approx. 4.5W/approx.4.7W (LCD monitor : Normal/Bright) (During recording and AF focusing)

During playback approx. 3.6W (LCD monitor : Normal)DV During recording approx. 3.8W (using CVF);

approx. 4.0W/approx.4.2W (LCDmonitor : Normal/Bright) (During recording and AF focusing)During playback approx. 3.2W (LCD monitor : Normal)

8 Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 88 × 80 × 138mm (Approx. 3.5 × 3.2 × 5.4 in) (Not including grip belt)9 Weight

9-1 Main unit Approx. 535g (1.2 lb)9-2 Total equipped weight Approx. 615g (1.4 lb)

(BP-2L13, tape and memory card included)10 Temperature and humidity requirements

10-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance 0°C to 40°C, 85% (relative humidity)

10-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation-5°C to 45°C, 60% (relative humidity)


27

3. System Diagram

BP-2L13, BP-2L14, NB-2LH Battery Pack

CB-2LWEBattery Charger

DTC-100 D Terminal Cable

CA-570 Compact Power Adapter

SC-2000 SoftCarrying Case

WS-20 Wrist Strap

SS-600/SS-650 Shoulder Strap

miniSD Card

BP-2L13, BP-2L14, NB-2LHBattery Pack

Computer

MiniDV Video cassette

WL-D87Wireless Controller

PictBridgeCompatible Printers

IFC-300PCUUSB Cable

SCART Adapter

DVD Recorder/Digital Device with DV Terminal

CTC-100 Component Cable

CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable

WD-H43Wide-converter

TL-H43Tele-converter

FS-43U/FS-43U IIFilter Set

VCR

TV/HDTV

STV-250N Stereo Video Cable

miniSD Card Adapter

Card Reader/Writer

HDMI Cable

VFL-1 Video Flash Light

VL-3 Video Light

DM-50 DirectionalStereo Microphone

Stereo Microphone(commercially available)

Fig. 2

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON

CONTENTS

1. Technical Description ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 HDMI Terminal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2 New Video Recording Standards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

1-2-1 HDV (PF25) and CINE Mode (Each of these modes is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode.) - 21-3 Improved Operability -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

2. PCB Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33. Power Supply Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

3-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

4. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 94-1 Outline ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 104-2 Operation at Charging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 104-2-2 Progress of Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

5. Signal Processing Circuit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 125-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 125-2 Camera Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 135-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

6. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 176-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 176-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 186-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 196-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 206-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21

6-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 216-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21

HV20 ETECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

1

1. Technical Description

1-1 HDMI Terminal

The HV20 E comes with an HMDI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) digital interface terminal for inputting and outputting thenext-generation video, audio and control signals. This is the interface which was developed for digital home appliances and audiovisualequipment. Using a completely digital system, the HDMI terminal enables the transfer of the video, audio and inter-unit control signalsby means of an easily routable cable provided with small (19-pin) terminals.When the HDMI terminal on the HV20 E is connected to another display unit, the information on the display unit’s capabilities referredas the EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) is read by the HV20 E, and the unit’s output format is determined. What happensnext is that the video images and sound best suited to the display unit are transmitted from the HV20 E main unit. This means that thereis now no longer the need to set the TV display mode (normal or wide) to match the display unit to which the HV20 E is connectedsomething that would be necessary with other terminals.The HV20 E does not support HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) for protecting contents from being copied, the CEC(Consumer Electronics Control) function for exercising reciprocal control between units or color space expansion.In this way, the standard of the video images output from the HV20 E is determined by the capabilities of the display unit connected tothe HV20 E, and the table below shows the sequence of priority for the output of the HV20 E in terms of each of the display unit’scapabilities.

(*1) : Down-conversion, (*2) : IP conversion after down-conversion, (*3) : IP conversion processingThe sound is delivered in one of the linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) output formats listed in the table below depending on themode of the HV20 E main unit.

Related specifications1. When a receiver is connected to the HV20 E main unit using the HDMI terminal, the video output to the component/composite

terminals is forcibly shut down.2. The audio signals to the AV terminal are output all the time if that terminal has been connected.3. If a DVI monitor (for a PC) has been connected, RGB signals in the 576P format will be output, but no guarantees are made for

the connections or quality of the images displayed on the monitor.4. During an HDMI connection, the “TV type” and “Component output” menu settings are grayed out and rendered inoperable.5. When HDV/DV signals are input or the analog input mode is established, the HDMI output is forcibly shut down.6. In both the SD and HD modes, the sound can be selected by setting “Audio output” as with the LINE OUT output when a 4-

channel tape is played back.7. DVI signals will be output if the EDID of the unit connected to the HV20 E cannot be read, if the EDID which has been read has

been destroyed or if the output format cannot be determined for some other reason.8. hen a copy-protected tape has been played back, the output signals of the HDMI terminal will be muted, and a warning will be

displayed.Neither will signals be output to the HDMI terminal when a “copy-disabled” tape on which digital broadcasts have beenrecorded with analog input signals is played back.(At such times, the EVF/LCD will also be muted.)

9. Bilingual audio signals cannot be output to the HDMI terminal.

Camera body Output 1080i 480i/576i 480i/576i 480P/576P 480P/576P

mode (16:9) (4:3) (16:9) (4:3)

HD 1 2 (*1) 4 (*1) 3 (*2) 5 (*2)

SD (wide) --- 1 3 2 (*3) 4 (*3)

SD (normal) --- 3 1 4 (*3) 2 (*3)

Print screen (HD) --- 1 (*1) 3 (*1) 2 (*2) 4 (*2)

Camera body mode Output

SD-12bit/32kHz-2ch/4ch 32kHz-16bit-2ch

SD-16bit/48kHz-2ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch

HD-48Hz-2ch/4ch 48kHz-16bit-2ch


2

The status settings can be checked on the menu screen.(1)When 1920 × 1080i signals are output, “1920 × 1080i” is displayed.(2)When 720 × 576i signals are output, “720 × 576i” is displayed.(3)When 720 × 576P signals are output, “720 × 576P” is displayed.(4)When DVI signals are output, “DVI” is displayed.(5)When no units have been connected or the output format has not been determined,

“---------” is displayed.

1-2 New Video Recording Standards

1-2-1 HDV (PF25) and CINE Mode (Each of these modes is effective only while the camera is in the tape mode.)

The HV20 E features some new functions that enable users to take shots with a cine-like quality or that can be applied as full-blowndigital cinema tools.(1) PAL : HDV (PF25)

The PF (Progressive Frame)25 setting, which has the same frame rate as cine shooting,has been added as a video recording standard. (Refer to the figure on the right.) Thisenables movie shooting at 25 frames per second which is a rate that takes full advantageof the progressive readout capability of the CMOS chip.When this mode is established, real 25P shooting with HD image quality is executed.In PAL areas, tapes are recorded in the 50i format using 2:3 pulldown.

(2) CINE modeJoining the mode in (1) is the “CINE mode” which has been added to enable shootingat a film image quality.(FUNC. setting: Refer to the figure on the right.)When CINE mode is established, the cine gamma, cine matrix and other image qualityadjustments which are based on custom preset 8 (CP8: CINE.V) of the XH G1 E, XHA1 E are performed. By setting both the cinema mode and the HDV (PF25) mode in(1), users can achieve images with a cine-like quality during TV viewing.What’s more, the HDV (PF25) mode and CINE mode can each be set independently:for instance, users can even set up the image quality of the CINE mode when the HDV/DV (wide)/DV (normal) setting has been selected. However, this setting is not avail-able in the AUTO mode.

1-3 Improved Operability

On the side panel at the front of the HV20 E main unit are a dedi-cated focus button for switching between Auto focus and manualfocus and a focus dial for focusing which team up to improvefocusing operations.The same side panel at the front of the HV20 E main unit has abacklight correction button (BLC button) for allocating the back-light correction function to make it easier for users to operate thefunction using their left hand while they are holding the camera intheir right hand.

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

HDV(PF25)

Fig. 3

CINE MODE

Fig. 4

Backlight correction button

Focus button(A/M switching)

Focusing dial


3

2. PCB Functions(1) MAIN PCB

System-Control Section• IC100 CCM MI-COM System control (Camera/Card/Mode)• IC101 FLASH Flash-ROM for CCM MI-COM (16Mbit)• IC102 EX-OR GATE Generation of address signals and CS signals• IC103 AND GATE Pass-ready notification signal between IC100/IC1101 (DIGIC DV II)

and between IC1000 (MPX)• IC104 MOTOR DRIVER IC Motor drive for barrier• IC105 NAND GATE Generation of address signals and CS signals• IC106 EX-OR GATE Generation of address signals and CS signals• IC107 NOR GATE Generation of address signals and CS signals• IC108 CHIP SELECT DECODER Generation of address signals and CS signals• IC109 ANALOG SWITCH MIC communication control

Camera/Card section• IC1000 MPX4 AGC, image composition, defective pixel compensation, serial/parallel

conversion• IC1100 DIGIC DV II Camera digital signal processing, card video image processing• IC1102 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV II (128Mbit)• IC1103 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV II (128Mbit)• IC1200 LENS DRIVER Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output AMP• IC1501 CVF DRIVER CVF signal processing/driving

Lens section• IC1611 SHIFT LENS DRIVER IC Driver IC for shift lens drive• IC1612 D/A CONVERTER 8-bit, 8ch D/A converter for adjusting shift lens, DMC and focus lens• IC1613 OPE AMP Shift lens positional sensor, sensor amplifier

Video section• IC2000 VRP2 Record playback head amplifier• IC2301 VIC HDV Digital VCR signal processing LSI, FR MI-COM,

Analog SD signal input/output processing• IC2303 1394IC IEEE 1394 digital signal processing (MPEG-2 TS / DV)• IC2306 OR GATE Serial communication control• IC2307 SDRAM Memory for video signal processing/recording signal processing• IC2308 AND GATE Timing adjustment at WRITE access to SRAM• IC2309 AND GATE Timing adjustment at WRITE access to SRAM• IC2310 FLASH/SRAM Memory for IC2303• IC2800 HDV CODEC IC Compression/expansion for video & audio HDV• IC2801 BASEBAND IC Component/SDI output, HD → SD conversion• IC2802 COMPONENT DRIVER 75Ω driver AMP for component output• IC2830 HDMI IC HDMI signal processing• IC2831 DUAL INVERTER IC For reversing signal logic• IC2833 PRESET AND CLEAR Signal control

Servo section• IC300 MOTOR DRIVER IC Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver

PM section• IC3200 MAIN POWER IC Power DC/DC converter (MAIN)• IC3260 3.2V REGULATOR 3.2V regulator• IC3261 4.6V REGULATOR 4.6V regulator• IC3300 SUB POWER IC Power DC/DC converter (SUB)• IC3310 5.0V REGULATOR 5.0V regulator


4

USB section• IC3500 USB IC USB I/F

Audio section• IC801 AIF4 Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifierUSB conector

(2) LCD PCB• IC901 LCD DRIVER LCD signal processing/driving• IC902 EEPROM EEPROM for LCD parts data• IC903 2.8V REGULATOR 2.8V regulator

(3) CVF PCB• IC1691 P SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular velocity detection• IC1692 Y SENSOR GYRO Yaw-direction angular velocity detection

(4) JACK PCB• IC501 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL FLASH main condenser electric charge control• IC502 CMOS IC Flash light emission switch drive

(5) CMOS SENSOR PCB• IC1040 INVERTER Standard logic inverter• IC1041 AFE Bch, Rch• IC1042 AFE Gch• IC1043 5V REGULATOR 5V regulator• IC1044 4.2V REGULATOR 4.2V regulator• IC1045 AMP Operational amplifier• IC1046 CMOS CMOS image sensor• IC1047 2.7V REGULATOR 2.7V regulator

(6) LCD PCBLCD open detection SW, LCD reversing detection SW

(7) REAR PCBEject SW

(8) CVF FPC PCBDisplay button switch, Easy direct button switch

(9) CARD PCBReset SW

(10) MF DIAL FPC PCBBacklight correction button switch, Focus button switch, Focus dial switch

(11) C COVER ZOOM FPC PCBZoom lever switch, Joystick switch, Photo button switch, SET button switch, Power supply switch button, Movie shootingmode selector switch, Start/stop button switch, Tape/Card selector switch, FUNC button switch


5

3. Power Supply Circuit

3-1 Startup of Power Supply

Fig. 5

3

A4

A5

C1C7

B5 A2

D16

E16

D17

E14

G1

C14

U10

A13

F9

G14

+CN3200

DC JACK

−

A16-A23CN3201

B13-B20A16-A23

CN1

CN500

CN1

CN1501CN102

CN872

CN873

B13-B20

Q100

BATTERYTERMINAL

VTRPOW SW

CAMPOW SW

EJECTSW

RESET

VTR ON IC3200

DC V DET

VTR ON IC3300

CAS IN

E3V

B RESETLI-POWER

CCMRESET

VTR ON

E3+LI

E3V

VCC

VCC

VCC CTL

SERIALDATA

IC2301FR MI-COM.(VIC HDV)

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC100CCM

MI-COM.

IC3300SUB POWER IC

IC3200MAIN POWER IC

+−

LITHIUMBATTERY

(2ND)

RESETSW

BATTERY WIRE

EJECT SW

POWER SW

CASSETTE COVER

MAIN PCB

CVF FPC

BATTERY WIRE

52 6

5 6

6 5EJECT PCB

CN100 6 5

2.8V REG.

B28

B28

12

DMC-IIICASSETTEIN SW


6

• Backup Lithium BatteryLI3V power from lithium battery is input to the IC3200-A2 pin, output from A4 pin and supplied to the MI-COM as its power.Thus, the MI-COM performs various data backup and clock operations when the main power supply is not connected.

• Main Power SupplyPower fed from main power (DC JACK/BATTERY) is input to IC3200, converted into 2.8V through its internal regulator andoutput as E3V from B5 pin.Due to internal switchover, instead of LI3V from lithium battery, 2.8V power output is supplied from the A4 pin through theinternal regulator.When power is fed from main power, the IC3200 outputs “H” signal from its C1 pin. When detecting this “H” signal, the MI-COMrecognizes that the main power supply has been connected, and performs initialization and is brought into the standby status.Under this status, the MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When detecting that any of the startup-relatedswitches has been turned on, the VCR ON (H) signal is output from C14 pin. Upon output of VCR ON (H) signal, the power foreach circuit is turned on.Power output from A5 pin of IC3200 is also used for recharging the lithium secondary battery.


7

3-2 Power Fuses

The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to five fuses on the MAIN PCB, through which the following seven powervoltages are delivered.

(1) SHOE : FU1900• Advanced accessory shoe power source

(2) DRUM + CAPSTAN : FU3203• DRUM/CAPSTAN

(3) ST UNREG : FU500• Main capacitor charging power source for flash memory

(4) 1.5V + 3.0V + 5.0V + 8.5V + VTR UNREG + DC/DC : FU3202• 1.5V power source (DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V)• 3.0V power source (AVDD3.0V, LCD3.0V, HA3.0V, USB3.2V, STROBE3.0V)• 5.0V power source (P5V, LDC5V, AVDD4.6V, AA4.6V, HA4.6V, AVDD3.2V, HDMI3.2V)• 8.5V power source (LDC8.5V)• VTR UNREG• DC/DC CONVERTER power source

(5) 1.2V + 1.8V + 2.7V + LCD : FU3203• 1.2V power source (MACS1.2V, AVDD1.2V, TRIPLET1.2V REG, VICX1.2V)• 1.8V power source (DDR1.8V, AFE1.8V, MACS SDRAM1.8V, SDRAM1.8V, HDMI1.8V)• 2.7V power source (DVDD2.7V, AVDD2.7V, AA2.7V, EVF2.7V)• LCD backlight drive power source (BL POW)

(6) CHARGE UNREG : FU1800• Battery Charge circuit power source

(7) 5.35V : FU3201• HDMI Power source• CAM5V Power source• 5.35V Power source (P5.15V)

Fig. 6

BATT. +BATT. TERMINAL

DC +

BATT +

MAIN PCB

DRUM, CAPSTAN

ST UNREG

FU3203

FU32015.35V

1.2V, 1.8V, 2.7V, LCD BL, −1.2V

FU1900SHOE

FU1800CHARGE UNREG

FU500

FU3200

1.5V, 3.0V, 5.0V, 8.5V, VTR UNREG,DC/DC IC(MAIN, SUB)

FU3202

CN3200

CN3201BATTERY WIRE

CN1


8

3-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 7 shows the power supply circuits.The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON signals output from the CCM MI-COM.

Fig. 7

IC3200SUB POWER IC

AVDD 1.4V

AA 2.7V

EVF 2.7V

AVDD 2.7V

DVDD 2.7V

C2

C7

G1

J1

N2

K1

VTR ONFrom CCM MI-COM.

CCD CAM ONFrom CCM MI-COM.

LCD BL ONFrom BACK END

MAIN PCB

DVDD 1.4V

AVDD 1.2V

VICX 1.2V

MACS 1.2V

A10

C6

HDMI 1.8V

SDRAM 1.8V

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

DVDD 1.8V

B10

TRIPLETS 1.2VA7

B7

C5

B5B4

SDRAM 1.8V

PWM

REG.

PWMG2

PWM

PWM

J2

HDMI 1.8V

AFE 1.8V

M8PWM

M2

AVDD2E 3VUNREG

LCD BL POW

LCD 8.5V

SENS −1.35V

LCD BL VFB

SW CTL

CTL 9

CTL 10

CTL

N8

LCD 5VLPF

K2

P5V

M5PWM

N5

C13

N10

D12

B12

C12

CTL7G11

M10

H11


9

4. Built-in Charger Circuit

Fig. 8

PM SECTION

BATT. TERMINAL

MAIN PCB

DETECT+

−

DC JACKCN3200

BATT −

BATT TEMPBATT INFO D

BATT INFO B+BATT +

THERMISTOR

BATTERY CN1

IC3200MAIN

POWERCONTROL

IC100CCM

MI-COM

OSC

OUTPUTDRIVE

CONTROL

E3V

BATT TEMPBATT INFO D

DC V DETDC J DETE3V

CHG CTLCHG CTL1

A/D VA/D I

K3 K11 M11

VCCL11 N11 M12 L12

J11

B5

B7

F9

C7

G13U10

D7A8

E12E11

B+

D

A32BATT TEMPB32BATT INFO D

A31BATT INFO B+A28-A30, B29-B31BATT+

BATTERY WIRE

UNREG.

CN3201

A32BATT TEMPB32BATT INFO DA31BATT INFO B+

A28-A30B29-B31BATT+

Q1801

FU1800Q1802

Q1803(Part)

−

+


10

4-1 Outline

The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.

(1) IC100 (CCM MI-COM)• Control of IC3200• Error discrimination and display• Detection and display of charging progress• Detection of DC JACK connection and voltage• Detection of internal battery temperature

(2) IC3200 (MAIN POWER IC)• Charging voltage/current control

4-2 Operation at Charging

4-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging

When the following conditions are satisfied, the CCM MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC3201 and starts charging.

Unless condition (4) is met, a charge error message appears, and no charging occurs.Unless condition (5) is met, no charge error message appears; charging does not start unless condition (5) is met.If the type in (6) could not be confirmed, a charge error is indicated.

Conditions Detection Source of detection

1 Main unit power is turned OFF CCM MI-COM -DC jack is connected. CCM MI-COM pin G13 DC JACK

DC J DETPower supplied from DC jack CCM MI-COM pin U10 DC IN

DC V DETUNREG voltage is within the range of CCM MI-COM pin A7 UNREG.8.03V to 8.80 V. BATT.A/DBattery temperature is within the range of CCM MI-COM pin C7 Battery T terminal -6.7°C to 49.4°C. BATT.TEMPConfirmation of the type of the battery connected CCM MI-COM pin B7 Battery D terminal

BATT.INFO D6

2

3

4

5


11

4-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC3200 starts a trickle charge under control of the CCM MI-COM (IC100). Trickle charge (1) continues until battery voltagereaches 5.2V; trickle charge (2) continues until battery voltage reaches 6.5V; as soon as battery voltage reaches 6.5V, the IC 3201 startsa 666mA quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedanceof the battery). When the charge current becomes 68mA or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementarycharging is performed for 72 minutes at maximum until the charge current becomes 33mA or less.

Fig. 9

480mA

68mA

33mA

72min.max204min.max162min.max

348min.max

When the battery voltagereaches 5.2 V, the trickletimer (2) is started.

Cha

rgin

g cu

rren

t LED flashes once LED flashes twice LED lights up steadily

Quick charge 666mA

When battery voltage reaches 6.5V, quick charge starts.

Trickle64mA

An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.7V or lower during quickcharging or constant-voltage charging. An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of−10.1 C to 55.6 C.

Quick charge timer2-flashtimer Supplementary charge timer

Elapsed time

Timeout error

Full charge indication at timeout

Full charge indication at timeout

Total timer

Trickle1 timer

Trickle2 timer

Timeout error

3min.max

Timeout error

76min. max


12

5. Signal Processing Circuit

5-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Shown in Fig.10 are the entire block and the visual/audio signal flow of the signal processing circuit under HD/SD mode.

Fig. 10

IC1046CMOS

IC801AIF4

IC280275Ω

DRIVER

IC1041AFE

R

SERIAL

SERIAL

R

B

IC1042AFE

Gr

Gb SERIAL

B

Gb

SERIALGr

IC1102SDRAM

IC1103SDRAM

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC1000MPX4 IC2801

BASEBANDIC

IC2307SDRAM

IC2000VRP2

IC23031394 IC

IC2800HDV

CODEC

CMOS SENSOR PCB

MAIN PCB

LENS

HDV/DVTERMINAL

AVJACK

RIGHTPCB

CVF FPC

HDMI FPC

COMPONENTOUTTERMINAL

miniSD

Analog SignalDigital Signal

REC/PBHEAD

IC2301VICHDV

IC901LCD

DRIVERLCD

IC1501CVF

DRIVER

IC2830HDMI IC

CVF

HDMITERMINAL

LCD PCB

PR

PB

Y

PR

PB

Y

HD mode only

SD mode only

L

R

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

VIDEO I/O

MIC

SPEAKER


13

5-2 Camera Signal Processing

<Outline>The CMOS sensor outputs R, B, Gr and Gb signals, respectively, at 4 channels. Then after processing in AFE, the CMOS SENSORcircuit board outputs serial signals at 384MHz still at 4 channels.On the Main circuit board, MPX4 performs CMOS sensor compensation such as compensation of unevenness in the 4ch outputs,and delivers RGB signals to DIGIC DV II as serial signals which are divided into 2 channels (even line and odd line) at 480MHz.The DIGIC DV II makes a general processing of moving image and still image signals while using two SDRAM. Moving imagesignals outputs video data to BASEBANDIC as non-compression HD signal at 1440 × 1080 in the HD mode and DV format signalsat 720 × 576(PAL) in the 8D mode.In the moving image mode, signals at 1920 × 1080 pixels (2M) are input to the DIGIC DV II and still images at 1920 × 1080 pixels(2M) can be recorded in the memory card.In the still image mode, signals at 1920 × 1440 (2.8M) are processed.

Fig. 11

IC1046CMOS IC1041

AFE

R

B

IC1042AFE

Gr

GbGb

Gr

B

R

384MHzSERIAL

48MHz

EVEN LINE

CCD LINE

460MHzSERIAL

IC1102SDRAM

IC1103SDRAM

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC1000MPX4

TOBASEBAND IC

CMOS SENSOR PCB MAIN PCB

MEMORYCARD

miniSD

R

TG

M-TG

OSC

G R GG B G BR G R G Sensor

correctionexchange

Still imageprocessing

Movieprocessing


14

5-3 Recorder Signal Processing

Figure 12 shows the signal processing circuit at HD mode.

Figure 13 shows the signal processing circuit at SD mode.

Fig. 12

: HD Signal

: MPEG Signal

: SD Signal

Audio

MPEG-2 TSDVTERMINAL

D.TERMINAL(Analog)

IC801AIF4

IC1100DIGICDV II

FRMI-COM

LCD/CVF

IC2800HDV

CODEC IC

IC23031394 IC

IC2801BASE BAND IC

IC2307SDRAM

IC2000VRP2

S/Video TERMINAL

VIDEOHEAD

IC2301VIC HDV

IC2830HDMI IC

HDMITERMINAL

Fig. 13

: SD SignalDV DVDVTERMINAL

D.TERMINAL(Analog)

IC801AIF4

IC1100DIGICDV II

FRMI-COM

IC2800HDV

CODEC IC

IC23031394 IC

IC2801BASE BAND IC

IC2000VRP2

S/Video TERMINAL

VIDEOHEAD

IC2301VIC HDV

LCD/CVF IC2307SDRAM

IC2830HDMI IC

HDMITERMINAL


15

< VIC HDV4 >IC2301- With built-in FR MI-COM, HDV recording is enabled in addition to the conventional SD recording in the VIC4. By performingHDV/DVD signal processing respectively in independent circuits, high-quality image is realized both in HDV and SD modes.In HD mode: HD video signal and audio data are input from the HDV CODEC IC as MPEG-2 PES data. In the VIC HDV, sub-code

data and ITI data are added and output to the VRP2 as 41.85Mbps data in HDV standard.In SD mode: The video data and signal input into the VIC HDV are processed in digital VTR standard. In the VIC HDV, audio data,

sub-code data and ITI data are also created, and these signals are output to the VPR2 as 41.85Mbps data in DVstandard.

< 1394 IC >IC2303In HD mode: The MPEG-2 PES signal is input from the HDV CODEC ITC. In this IC, it is converted into MPEG-2 TS signal and

output from the HDV/DV terminal.In SD mode: The DV signal input from the VIC HDV is output as it is from the HDV/DV terminal.

When the signal is input to the HDV/SD terminal, the description shown above is reversed, both for HD and SDmodes.

< VRP2 >IC2000In the VRP2, the recorded data of 41.85Mbps output from the VIC HDV is amplified and recorded onto the magnetic tape whileswitching between the CH-1 and CH-2 heads by switching pulses. During playback, the head output signal is amplified and fed tothe VIC HDV.

< HDV CODEC IC >IC2800With the built-in CODEC memory, CODEC of video/audio signal is performed in HD mode.As the video data, HD non-compressed signal is input from the BASEBAND IC. This HD signal is converted into compressed datain MPEG-2 standard.As the audio data, non-compressed signal is input from the AIF4 and compressed into MPEG-1 Audio Layer2 (2ch) / MPEG-2Audio Layer2 (4ch) standard.Video data and audio data are mixed and output in MPEG-2 PES standard.When HDV playback as well as MPEG-2 TS input, the MPEG-2 PES signal is received from the VIC HDV/1394 ITC, decoded intoHD signal and output to the BASEBAND IC.

< BASEBAND IC >IC2801In HD mode, analog signal (D terminal output) and digital non-compressed HD signal (HD-SDI output) are output from the non-compressed HD signal input from the DIGIC DV II, and the non-compressed HD signal is supplied to the HDV CODEC ICsimilarly. Also, the video signal down-converted into SD standard is output to the VID HDV for analog video output as well as LCDdisplay.In SD mode, SD signal is input from the DIGIC DV II. The SD signal is output to the D terminal output/SDI output and VIC HDV.For HDMI output in HD mode, video signal is up-converted or down-converted depending on the EDID of the display device.

< HDMI IC >IC2830Video data input from BASEBAND IC and audio data input from VIC HDV are mixed and output from the HDMI terminal. IPconversion is performed according to the EDICD of the display device.


16

5-4 Audio Signal Flow

< AIF4 >IC801Incorporates input selector SW, microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A and digital I/F ALC.Performs switchover between built-in microphone input and line input (by means of the serial data from the mode MICOM, ALC(Auto Level Control), fading and amplification of respective output signals.The beeping sound at eject is generated in the circuit from the signals from the FR MICOM and switched over in the AIF. Normal sound and beeping sound are switched over in the AIF.

< VIC HDV >IC2301For the purpose of reducing the mechanical noise of the DMC, the following processings are performed.• Noise cancellation processing is performed by means of the correlation of the noise components at V frequency.To eliminate image delay with respect to sound due to processing time of video signals of the camera, sound data is stored in theSRAM and the timing of the video is matched with that of the sound.

< HDV CODEC IC >IC2800In the HD mode, receives sound data from the AIF4 and compresses it according to the HDV standard and delivers it to the VICHDV. When playing back, receives compressed sound data from the VIC HDV, extracts them and outputs them to the AIF4.

< AUTO WIND CUT >In the HV10 A, in order to effectively reduce the wind sound, the cut-off frequency of the wind-cut HPF is changed depending onthe level of wind sound.

< HDMI IC >IC2830Receives audio data received from the VIC HDV, mix it with video data received from the BASEBAND IC and outputs them fromthe HDMI terminal in linear PCM.

Fig. 14

SPEAKERDRIVER

FRMI-COM.

IC2830HDMI IC

HDMITERMINAL

IC801AIF4

IC2800HDV

CODECIC

IC2301VICHDV

IC2307SDRAM

IC2000VRP2

+

−

L

L

R

RMIC

AVJACK

BEEP

SERIAL

SPEAKER

REC/PBHEAD

HD mode

SD mode


17

6. System Control, Servo

6-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 15 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performedby the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and CCM MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN PCB.

Fig. 15

DMC III

MAIN PCB

CVF FPCCASSETTECOVER

LCD KEY

FOCUSDIAL

LCD PCB

LCD FPC

CMOSSENSOR

HEAD

M

FG/PG

DRUM

CAPSTAN

LOADING

FG

REEL FG

M

M

CARD PCB

LCD PANEL

CVF PANEL

AF SENSOR

DISP. SW

PRINT SW

FRMI-COM

VIC

IC100CCM

MI-COM

IC801AIF4

IC1501CVF

DRIVER

IC901LCD

DRIVER

IC1200LENS

DRIVER

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC1046CMOS

IC1041IC1042

AFE

IC2000VRP2

IC101FLASH

LENS

DRUM ON CAP ON

IC1000MPX4

IC300MOTORDRIVER

ICIC2301VIC HDV

CAPSTANDRIVER

DRUMDRIVER

MODE SWC.DOWN SW

BOT/EOTSENS.DEW

MIC

LOADINGDRIVER

DFG/PGCFGREEL FG

IRIS DRIVE

MOTOR DRIVE

MODE SW

FUNC. SW

START/STOPSW

SET SW

POWER SW

ZOOM SW

PHOTOSW

TAPE/CARDSW

STOP SW

FF SW

REW SW

PLAY SW

MEMORYCARD

EJECT SW

BLC SW

FOCUSSW

FOCUS DIALSW


18

6-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC HDV)The FR microcomputer is provided to control the mechanisms and to detect signals for sensors/switches (DMC III).Listed below are the main functions of the FR microcomputer:

• VIC (Video) control / AIF4 (Audio Interface) controls• BASEBAND IC/HDV CODEC IC/1394 IC/USB IC/HDMI IC control• AUDIO control• DMC III mechanism control• OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control• LCD control

* The FR MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FRMI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and datamodification regarding the FR MI-COM.

(2) CCM MI-COM (IC100)The major functions of the CCM MI-COM are listed below.

• Camera section control• Various key inputs• Remote control input• Power ON/OFF control• Built-in clock• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control• AF sensor control• Card control• Lens control (communication with the lens microcomputer)

* In adjustment or data alteration regarding the CCM MI-COM, it is not required to update the flash ROM.


19

6-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC HDV (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in termsof signal flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FRMI-COM. Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal(PWM), which is driven on the MAIN PCB for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.

Fig. 16

IC2301VICHDV

S REEL Hall SENSOR

LOADING MOTOR

DRUM MOTOR

CAPSTAN MOTOR

T REEL Hall SENSOR

LOAD ON/UNLOAD FR

DERR

LOAD+/LOAD-DMC III

U/V/W

Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil

CFG2D

RU

M C

AP

PO

W

CERR

DA CFG

DA S REEL

DA T REEL

IC300MOTOR DRIVER IC

DC JACK(BATTERY)


20

6-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)

At a normal status, the image signal created by the camera is sent through DIGIC DV II to the memory card, and also through VICHDV to the DV terminal.When USB is connected, the USB terminal and memory card are connected through the USB IC, and the DV image processingcircuit and USB terminal are connected through B CHIP and USB IC.

Fig. 17

Signal flow of Normal

Signal flow of USB connection

Movie/StillImageSignal

Processing

DVImage

Processing

IC3500USB IC

IC1102IC1103SDRAM

IC1000MPX4

IC1046CMOS

IC1041IC1042

AFE

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC2301VIC HDV

MEMORYCARD

USBTERMINAL

CCMMI-COM

FRMI-COM.

VIDEOHEAD

DIF

IC2000VRP 2

DVTERMINAL


21

6-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), operations prescribed by each mode takeeffect. The LCD indicates “PLEASE REMOVE THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.

6-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.

6-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table shows processing after error detection.

• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear

• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)

Kind Condition Detection

Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG

FG frequency when steady 900Hz

Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.

Steady : 30% max.

Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.

Steady : 0.5sec.

Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG

FG frequency when steady 1347Hz

Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.

Steady : 60Hz max.

Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.

Steady : 2sec.

Reel error Error detecting mode Starting / Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG

Error detection Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is C-FG

Starting : 3296 or more

Steady : 2256 or more

UNLOAD : Reel FG cycle is 1 sec or more

(Take-up reel only for both)

Loading error Error detecting mode Mode transfer Mode SW

Error detection Mode transfer time

STANDBY-STOP : 6sec

STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec

STOP-PLAY : 3sec

Cassette in Loading Duringunloading

Loadingcompleted

During tape running

During modetransfer

Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stopCapstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop

Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop

Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop

DISASSEMBLING

CONTENTS

1. Disassembling and Reassembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1Notes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1List of Supplies -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31-2 Separation of Bottom Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 41-3 Separation of Top Cover Ass’y --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71-5 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91-6 Separation of Cassette Cover Ass’y -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 111-7 Separation of CARD PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 131-8 Separation of CVF Battery Case Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 141-9 Separation of Camera Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 161-10 Separation of JACK PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 181-11 Separation of MAIN PCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 201-12 Separation of Main Holder Ass’y --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 231-13 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 241-14 Separation of LCD Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 251-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Ass’y ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 271-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 281-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 291-18 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 311-19 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 331-20 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 351-21 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 3 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 371-22 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 4 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 391-23 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 411-24 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 431-25 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 441-26 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 451-27 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

1

1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes

(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure

diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.

(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401C (CY9-8011-000)(4) If any part to be replaced has tape attached to it, be sure to reattach the tape at the same position when reassembling.(5) After detaching the Front Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor.

(Since a high voltage is applied to the Main Capacitor, take care not to receive electric shock or to short-circuit other parts.)

• Lateral engaging connector(The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)

: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) ∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.

Metal contact (Pins face up)

Metal contact (Pins face down)

:

:

• Lengthwise engaging connector( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)Indicated by → Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the

shafts indicate the noncontacts.

Metal contact

Metal contact

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

2

List of Supplies

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks Hanarl KS-39M DY9-3053-000 Lubrication CoverAdhesive Tape, No. 354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape

(W L T : 9mm 50m 0.15mm, UL type)Adhesive Tape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose

(W L T : 10mm 50m 0.16mm, UL type) double-sided adhesive tape NITTO NO. 31C Tape DY9-3057-000 General-purpose adhesive tape Black(W L T : 10mm 30mm 0.055mm)

Three Bond 1401C CY9-8011-000 Adhesive Screw

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

3

1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instructions on the chart.(2) Reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedures.

START

END

: MAIN FLOW

: SUB FLOW

: MAIN UNIT

1-4 Front Cover Unit

1-16 LCD Hinge Unit

1-13 Focus Dial Ass'y

1-14 Speaker

1-17 LCD

1-9 Camera Unit

1-14 LCD Unit

1-5 R-LCD Unit

1-20 CVF PCB

1-20 CVF LCD

1-22 Battery Terminal

1-24 CMOS Sensor Ass'y

1-24 Auto Focus Ass'y

1-28 Lens Unit

1-9 Recorder Unit

1-17 Back Light Ass'y

1-17 LCD PCB

1-10 JACK PCB

1-11 REAR PCB

1-12 DMC III

1-11 MAIN PCB

1-2 Bottom Cover

1-3 Top Cover Ass'y

1-6 Cassette Cover Ass'y

1-7 CARD PCB

1-8 CVF Battery Case Unit

1-9 Flash Ass'y

1-9 Camera Recorder Unit

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

4

1-2 Separation of Bottom Cover

(1) Remove eight screws (a × 6, b × 2), and detach the Bottom Cover.(2) Remove two screws (c × 2). Open the LCD, disengage claw A, and detach the Eyecup.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Bottom Cover as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 1

3mmMetalM1.7

a b4mm

MetalM1.7

c

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note on Reassembling (1)

(1)

(2)B

(2)Eyecup

EyecupLCD

(1) - a (1) - a

(1) - a

(1) - a

(1) - a

(2) - c

(2) - c

(1) - b

(1) - b

Pull

(1) - a

(1) - a

(1) - b

(1) - b

Press

Press

Bottom Cover

Bottom Cover

Claw A

Pull section B and disengage claw A.

Fasten the screws with the Bottom Cover pressed to the arrow direction.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

5

1-3 Separation of Top Cover Ass’y

(1) Detach the Shoe Lid.(2) Remove four screws (d × 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe.(3) Open the Cassette Cover, remove four screws (e × 4), lift up the rear section, and detach the Top Cover Ass’y.

Note : Be careful not to drop the screw shown in the figure below.(4) Disconnect the CN701, and separate the Top Cover Ass’y.

Fig. 2

5mm

d

MetalM1.7

Flat Head Screw

e3mm

MetalM1.7

Note

Lift up

(2) - d

(2) - d

(3) - e

(3) - e

(3) - e

(1)

Shoe Lid

AccessoryShoe

(2)

(3)

(4)

CN701

Cassette Cover

(3)

Top Cover Ass'y

(3)

Be careful not to drop the screw.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

6

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Top Cover Ass’y as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 3


e

e

Cassette Cover

Top Cover Ass'y

Top Heatsink PlateTop GND Plate

Insert

CN701

1.

2.

PressPress

Press Fasten this screw first.Be careful not to drop it.

Fold the Mic Wire to the rear side so as to prevent it from going to the Cassette Cover side.

Connect the CN701, insert the front section of the Top Cover Ass'y, and attach the Top Cover Ass'y.

Four screws e should be fastened with the Top Cover Ass'y pressed against the main unit.

Treat the Mic Wire within this range.

Be careful not to place it onto the Top GND Plate and Top Heatsink Plate.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

7

1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit

Note 1 : After separating the Front Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (A high voltage is present onthe circuit. Be careful not to receive electric shock or cause accidental contact with other parts.)

Note 2 : Just before attaching the Front Cover Unit, perform Parallax adjustment after removing the Lens absorber.(Refer to “SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT”)

Note 3 : When attaching/detaching Front Cover Unit, be careful not to shake the Auto Focus Ass’y of Camera Unit.Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Ass’y. (The Auto Focus Ass’y requires fine adjustment.)

(1) Detach the Grip Belt. Open the LCD and Jack Cover, remove eight screws (a × 1, c × 1, e × 5, f × 1), disconnect the CN3, and detachthe Front Cover Unit.

(2) Disconnect the CN100, and separate the Front Cover Unit.(3) Detach the Jack Cover.

Fig. 4

f

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4mm

a4mm

MetalM1.7

e3mm

MetalM1.7

c

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3

(1)

Grip Belt

Jack Cover

JACK PCB

MainCapacitor

Front Cover Unit

Lens Absorber

Auto Focus Ass’y

(1)

LCD

(2)

(1)

(3)

(1) - a

(1) - c

(1) - e

(1) - e (1) - e

(1) - e

(1) - f(1) - f

CN100

CN3

Jack Cover

Front Cover Unit

Open

Discharge resistance : Approx.1KΩ

Discharge points

Take care not to shake theAuto Focus Ass’y.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

8

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Front Cover Unit as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 5


Fold

Fold

Front Cover Unit

Front Cover Unit

Flexible cable of the Focus Dial Ass'y

CN100FRONT FPC Ass'y

CN3

Front Cover Unit

3.

1. 2.

Fasten the screws with the Front Cover Unit pressed to the arrow direction.

Take care not to pinch the flexible cable between the Front Cover Unit and the Main Unit.

Connect the FRONT FPC Ass'y to the CN100 and while folding it as illustrated, attach the Front Cover Unit

Fold the flexible cable as illustrated and insert it into the CN3.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

9

1-5 Separation of R-LCD Unit

(1) Remove one screw (e × 1), and detach the Top Heatsink Plate.(2) Remove seven screws (c × 2, e × 4, g × 1), disconnect the CN103 and CN900, and detach the R-LCD Unit.

Note : The screw g is not reusable. When the screw g has been removed, use a new service part.

Fig. 6

ge3mm

MetalM1.7

3mmMetalM1.7

NK Setscrew

c

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

(2) - c

(1) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(2) - g(2)

(2)

(2)

(1)

Top Heatsink Plate

CN900

CN103

R-LCD Unit

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

10

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the R-LCD Unit as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 7


R-LCD Unit

Top Right Key

LCD FPC Ass'yCN900

CN103

Speaker Wire

Speaker Wire

CARD PCBLithium 2nd Battery

Engage the claw.

1. Attach the R-LCD Unit to the main unit.

2.

Take care not to deform the sheet metal.

Take care not to damage the surface of the Top Right Key.

Connect the flexible cable and cable to the CN103 and CN900, and then fasten thescrews.

Treat the remaining part of the Speaker Wire within this range.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

11

1-6 Separation of Cassette Cover Ass’y

(1) Disconnect the CN100, peel off the NO.31C Tape, and remove three screws (h × 3).(2) Open the Cassette Cover Ass’y, and remove three screws (c × 1, h × 1, i × 1).(3) Disengage the claws while lifting the lower section of the Cassette Cover Ass’y, and detach the Cassette Cover Ass’y, Cassette Hook

and Hook SpringNote : Take care not to lose the Spring.

Fig. 8

h i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

MetalM1.7

4mm

c

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

(1)(3)

(3)

(3)

(1)

No.31C Tape(9 × 20mm)

CN100

Cassette Hook

Cassette CoverAss'y

Cassette CoverAss'y

Hook Spring

(2) - c

(2) - c

(2) - i

(2) - i

(1) - h(1) - h

(2) - h

(2) - h

(2)

Claws

Claw

Lift up

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

12

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Cassette Hook and Hook Spring as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the Cassette Cover Ass’y as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>Cassette Cover Ass’y : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)

Fig. 9

Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)


Hook Spring

Hook

Cassette Hook

Main HolderAss'y

Slide

Attach the Hook Spring to the Cassette Hook and hang the end of the Hook Spring on the hook.Slide the Cassette Hook along the Main Holder Ass'y as it is and attach it to the Main Holder Ass'y.

Cassette CoverAss'y

CN100CARD PCBBottom Frame

Convex section

Main Holder Ass'y

NO.31C Tape(9 × 20mm)

Attachment reference :Less than ±1mm

Attachment reference :Less than ±1mm

Claw

Claws

Take care not to extend onto the dowels.

Align the flexible cable with the outline of the Bottom Frame.

Connect the CN100, and then fix the flexible cable with the NO.31C Tape.

Align the convex section of the flexible cable and the NO.31C Tape with the edge of the Main Holder Ass'y.

Fix the flexible cable to the Bottom Frame and the Main Holder Ass'y with NO.31C Tape with the tape center aligned with the centerline ofthe flexible cable.

Put up the Cassette Cover Ass'y, engage it with three claws of the Main Holder Ass'y and attach it to the Main Holder Ass'y. After attachment, carry out the Cassette Hook operation check.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

13

1-7 Separation of CARD PCB

(1) Disconnect the CN104, remove two screws (e × 2), and detach the CARD PCB.(2) Unsolder (α), disconnect the CN102, and detach the Lithium 2nd Battery and CARD FPC.(3) Remove two screws (e × 2), and detach the Heatsink Plate.

Note : Take care not to deform the Heatsink Plate.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Before using the CARD FPC supplied as a service part, allow it to fold at the position shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the CARD FPC as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 10

e3mm

MetalM1.7

Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)CARD FPC

CARD PCB

Heatsink Plate

CARD FPC

Lithium 2ndBattery

CARD FPCCN104

CN102

MAIN PCBCN102

CARD PCBCN104

Fold it slightly

(1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(2)

(1) - e

(3) - e

CN104

CN102Solder α

Folding in atrough form

Folding in acrest form

Push into the depth.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

14

1-8 Separation of CVF Battery Case Unit

(1) Open the Rear Jack Cover, remove five screws (e × 4, i × 1), and detach the Rear Cover and Rear Jack Cover.(2) Remove four screws (e × 4), and to ensure that CVF Battery Case Unit is pulled up.(3) Disconnect the CN1501 and CN3201, and separate the CVF Battery Case Unit.

Fig. 11

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

e3mm

MetalM1.7

(3)

(3)

(1)

CN3201

(3)

(1)

Rear Cover

Rear Jack Cover

CVF Battery Case Unit

CN1501

(1) - e

(1) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(1) - e

(1) - i

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

15

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the CVF Battery Case Unit as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the Rear Cover as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 12



CN1501

Shoe Base

DC Jack

Rear Jack Cover

Attach the Rear Jack Cover. Insert the opening of the Rear Cover into the DC Jack and engage the two dowels.

Rear Cover Rear Cover

Top Frame Ass'y

BottomFrame

Main Holder Ass'y

Top FrameAss'y

CVF BatteryCase Unit

CN3201

1 - e

1.

3.Put the Shoe Base close against the the two standing sections of the Top Frame Ass'y.Fasten screw 2- e .

Put it close against the the standing sectionof the Bottom Frame. Fasten screw 3- e .

2.

Put the Top Frame Ass'y close against the Main Holder Ass'y.

2 - e

(3) - e

Engage

Dowels

Dowels

Opening

Standing sections

Standing section

Put it close against the standing sections.

Put it close against the standing section.

Connect the CN1501 and CN3201. Attach the CVF Battery Case Unit and fasten screw 1- e .

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

16

1-9 Separation of Camera Unit

Note : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focue Ass’y. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Ass’y.(1) Remove one screw (e × 1), disconnect the CN1502, CN1503, and detach the Flash Ass’y.(2) Disconnect the CN1000 and CN1040 (B to B), CN1200, and CN1600, remove four screws (e × 4), and detach the Camera Unit.(3) Disconnect the CN1700, and separate the Camera Unit.

Fig. 13

e3mm

MetalM1.7

Note

(1)

(2)

Camera Unit

Auto Focus Ass'y

(2)(2)

CN1503

CN1502 (3)

(1)

Flash Ass'y (2)

(1) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

(2) - e

CN1040(B to B)

CN1000(B to B)

CN1700

CN1200

CN1600

Take care not to shake the Auto Focus Ass'y and take load.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

17

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Camera Unit as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the Flash Ass’y as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 14



Camera UnitCamera Unit

CN1700

CN1600

Flexible cable ofthe Auto Focus Ass'y

2.1.

3.

IS FPC

Push in

(1) - e

(2) - e

(3) - e (3) - e

1

1

2

2

Flash Ass'y

Hold the Flash Ass'y until it is put close against the Main Unit.

Hold the Camera Unit until it is put close against the Main Unit.

Hold the Camera Unit until it is put close against the Main Unit.

e

Back side

The Camera Unit should be set atthe upperposition.

The Camera Unit shouldbe set at the upper position.

Connect the CN1700 and while folding flexible cable of the Auto Focus Ass'y, attach the Camera Unit. Because the CN1700 is hard to insert,take care not to damage the flexible cable.

Position the Camera Unit in the arrow direction and fix it with screws in the order shown in the figure.

Screws e should be fastened withthe Flash Ass'y pressed against the main unit.

Place the remaining part of the IS FPC between the Lens Unit and the MAIN PCB.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

18

1-10 Separation of JACK PCB

Note 1 : In disassembling, make sure that the Main Capacitor has been discharged.(Refer to 1-4 Separation of Front Cover Unit.)

(1) Remove three screws (j × 3), disconnect the CN501, and detach the JACK PCB.Note 2 : When removing the CN501, be careful not to cut the flexible cable by lifting the JACK PCB forcibly.

(2) Unsolder (α) at two places, and detach the AL-EL Capacitor.(3) Remove one screw (e × 1), and detach the Bottom Frame and Bottom Shield.

Fig. 15

j2.5mm

BronzeM1.7

e3mm

MetalM1.7

Note 2 Jack PCB

Be careful not to cut.

(1)

JACK PCB

(1)

(1)

(3)

(3)

Bottom FrameBottom Shield

AL-EL Capacitor(1) - j

CN501

(3) - eSolder α

Double Sided Tape(Back side)

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

19

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the JACK PCB as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the Bottom Shield as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the Bottom Frame as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 16



CN501JACK PCB

AL-EL Capacitor

MAIN PCB

MAIN-JACK FPC

1. 2.

Sit on

Turn the JACK PCB outward.

Bottom Frame

Bottom Frame

Bottom Shield

Dowel

Dowel

Connectors

Capstan Motor flexible cable

Push in

While being careful not to cut the MAIN-JACK FPC, turn the JACK PCB outward. (This makes the AL-EL Capacitor sit on the MAIN PCB.)

Place the JACK PCB at the position shown in the figure, fold the MAIN-JACK FPC, and insert it into the CN501.

Double Sided Tape(Back side)

Attachment reference :Less than −0.5mm

Attachment reference :Less than −0.5mm

The connectors should not be covered with the flexible cable.

Insert the tip of the Bottom Frame.

Push in the Bottom Frame, position with respect to the two dowels, and attach the Bottom Frame.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

20

1-11 Separation of MAIN PCB

(1) Peel off the NO.31C Tape, remove two screws (j × 2), and detach the MAIN PCB Shield, Grand Plate, and Fuse Label.(2) Remove three screws (j × 3), disengage rib A and B, disconnect the CN300 to CN303 and CN2000, and detach the MAIN PCB,

REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC.Note : To prevent damage to the EJECT SW of the REAR PCB, be sure to close the Main Holder Ass’y.

(3) Disconnect the CN101, CN2800, and CN2830, and detach the MAIN-JACK FPC, REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC from MAIN PCB.(4) Unsolder (α) at two places, and detach the Rear Wire from REAR PCB.

Fig. 17

j2.5mm

BronzeM1.7

CN301

CN101

CN2000

CN2800

CN302CN303

MAIN PCB

MAIN PCB

CN300

CN2830

(1)

Fuse Label

Grand Plate

(1)

(1)

(2)

(2)

REARPCB

Rear Wire

HDMI FPC

HDMI FPC

CN2830

(2)

(3) (3)

(3)

MAIN-JACK FPC

MAIN PCB Shield

(4)

(2) - j

(2) - j

(1) - j


Rib A

Rib B

1

2

Disengage rib Aand B in this order.

Solder α

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

21

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Rear Wire as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the MAIN-JACK FPC as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the MAIN PCB as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 18



HDMI FPC

CN2830

CN2000CN301

CN302CN303

CN300 Rib A

Rib A

Rib B

Rib B

After attaching the MAIN PCB, connect the CN300.

2

1

JACK PCBCN501

Rear Wire

REAR PCB

REAR PCB

MAIN-JACK FPCMAIN PCB

MAIN PCB

CN2800

CN2800

CN2800

HDMI FPC

HDMI FPC

HDMI FPC

CN101

MAIN-JACK FPC

MAIN PCBCN2800

LongShort

Fold it smoothly

Black

Red

Push

1.

2.

Solder α



Connect the CN2800, push the HDMI FPC, and make it remain folded.

HDMI FPC should be set at the outside position.

Insert the rib B and A in this order.Connect the CN301 to CN303 and CN2000, and then attach the MAIN PCB while inserting rib A and B.

Connect the MAIN-JACK FPC, REAR PCB, and HDMI FPC to the MAIN PCB connectors.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

22

(4) Attach the REAR PCB as shown in the figure below.(5) Attach the Fuse Label and NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below.(6) Attach the MAIN PCB Shield as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>Main Holder Ass’y : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)

Fig. 19




MAIN PCB Shield

CN102

CN1200

REAR PCB

Position with respect to the two dowels and attachthe REAR PCB. To prevent damage to the EJECT Switch, be sure to close the Main Holder Ass'y.

Eject Switch

Push in

Main Holder Ass'y

CN3201

Fuse LabelMain Holder Ass'y

Main HolderAss'y

Grand Plate

Dowels

NO.31C Tape (9 × 15mm)

Insert into the Main Holder Ass'y.

Attachment reference :±0.3mm

Attachment reference :±1mm





Make it hit against the CN1200.

Make it hit against the CN102.

Loading Motor flexible cable is placed below the Main Holder Ass'y.

Fix the flexible cable with NO.31C Tape with the tape center aligned with the centerline ofthe flexible cable.

Fix the flexible cable with NO.31C Tape with the tape center aligned with the edge ofthe Main Holder.

Align with the end of the Grand Plate.

Align with the side wall of the CN3201.

Before attaching the Grand Plate, attach the Fuse Label.Cover the flexible cable completely.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

23

1-12 Separation of Main Holder Ass’y

(1) Remove three screws (k × 3), and detach the Ground Plate.(2) Open the Main Holder Ass’y, and detach it by pulling it out of the DMC III.

Fig. 20

k

3.4mmMetalM1.4

Stepped Screw

DMC III

Ground Plate Main Holder Ass'y(1) - k

(2)

(2)

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

24

1-13 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit

(1) Remove three screws (i × 3), and detach the Focus Dial Ass’y and GND Plate.Note : Take care not to deform the GND Plate.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the GND Plate as shown in the figure below.(2) Before using the Focus Dial Ass’y supplied as a service part, provide preliminary folding at the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 21

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note on Reassembling (2)Note on Reassembling (1)

GND Plate

GND Plate

Focus Dial Ass'y

Focus Dial Ass'y

Focus Dial FPC

(1) - i

(1) - i(1)

(1)Push out lightly

Hole

Insert

Dowels

Folding in a crest form

Insert into the hole, position with respect to the dowels, and attach the GND Plate.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

25

1-14 Separation of LCD Unit

(1) Remove two screws (a × 2), and detach the Tripod Base.(2) Open the LCD Unit. Remove five screws (a × 1, c × 1, i × 3), and detach the opening/closing SW part of LCD FPC Ass’y, Heatsink

Plate, Speaker, and LCD Unit.Note 1 : When mounting the opening/closing Switch part of the LCD FPC Ass’y or unmounting it, be sure to open the

LCD Unit (to prevent possible damage to the Switch part).Note 2 : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Ass’y; keep it at the position where the LCD

is open all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing).Note 3 : Be careful when removing the screw shown in the red frame in the illustration, which is coated with screw

lock adhesive.(3) Unsolder (α) at two places, and detach the Speaker Wire.

Fig. 22

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

a c4mm

MetalM1.7

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note 2

Spring

Hinge Bracket B

LCD Unit

(2)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(2)

Heatsink Plate

Speaker

Speaker Wire Tripod Base

Opening/closing SW section

aa

(1) - a

(2) - a (2) - c

(2) - i

(2) - i

Solder (α)

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

26

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the LCD Unit as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the Speaker and Speaker Wire as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the Heatsink Plate as shown in the figure below.(4) Attach the Tripod Base as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>Three Bond 1401C (CY9-8011-000)

Fig. 23




LCD FPC Ass'ySpeaker

Speaker Wire

Solder section

Dowel

Red

Black

Ribs

Ribs

Speaker Wire

Heatsink Plate

HeatsinkPlate

Tripod Base

D

E

Speaker Wire

Make it hit against.

Dowel A

Dowel C

Dowel B

Dowel A

Pass the Speaker Wire through between ribs and dowel.

Opening/closing SW section

Position with respect to dowel B and C, attach the LCD Unit and insert LCD FPC Ass'y into dowels A.

Passing the Speaker Wire through the section D and the Open/close SW section through the section E, attach Heatsink Plate.

After fixing screws, the Heatsink Plate and the Right Cover should be close together.

The soldered section on the Speaker should not touch the Heatsink Plate.

Take care not to pinch the Speaker Wire.

Apply the three Bond 1401C to the screw a .

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

27

1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Ass’y

(1) Remove one screw (i × 1), and detach the LED Window.(2) Open the Card Lid, and detach the Card Lid Shaft and Card Lid.(3) Detach the Blind Sheet, LCD Cushion and LCD Gray Cushion.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Card Lid and Card Lid Shaft as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 24

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)


LED Window

Blind Sheet

Card Lid

Card Lid Shaft

Card Lid Shaft

Push against

(1) - i

(1) - i

(3)

(1)

(2)

(2) (2)

(3)

(3)

(3)

Right Cover

LED Window

LCD Cushion

LCD Gray Cushion

Blind Sheet

Card Lid

Open

Card Lid Shaft

With the Card Lid closed, insert the Card Lid Shaft and attach the Card Lid.

Double Sided Tape

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

28

1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1

Note : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Ass’y; keep it in a position where the LCD isopen all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing).

(1) Turn the LCD Hinge Unit in the direction indicated in the figure shown below, and then remove two screws (a × 2).(2) Disengage claws A, B, C, D, E and F (six positions), and detach the LCD Top Cover.(3) Disconnect the CN901, and detach the LCD Hinge Unit.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the LCD Hinge Unit and LCD FPC as shown in the figure below.(2) To attach the LCD Top Cover, insert Claws E and F first, and then Claws B, D, A and C in this order.

Fig. 25

a4mm

MetalM1.7

Note



(3)

(1) LCD Hinge Unit

Hinge Bracket B

(2)

Spring

CN901

LCD Top Cover

LCD FPC Ass'y

LCD FPC

CN901 LCD TopCover

LCD GNDPlate

Push in

(1) - a

Claw C

Claw C

Claw D

Claw D

Claw F

Claw E

Claw F

Claw E

Claw A

Claw B

Claw A

Claw B

Bend the LCD FPC to the edge of the LCD GND Plate.

Bend the surplus part.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

29

1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2

(1) Peel off NO.31C Tape ( × 2), disconnect the CN902 and CN50, unsolder (α), and detach the LCD PCB section, Back Light Ass’y,and LCD.

(2) Remove one screw (m × 1), and detach the LCD Insulator and LCD PCB.(3) Detach the LCD Key Ass’y.

Note : The LCD Key Ass’y is not reusable. When it has been removed, use a new service part.

Fig. 26

m2.5mm

MetalM1.7

CN902

CN50LCD PCB

(1)(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(3)

(2)

Back Light Ass'y

LCD Key Ass'y

LCD GND Plate

LCD

LCD Insulator

LCD B Cover



(2) - m

Solder (α)

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

30

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the LCD Key Ass’y as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the from LCD GND Plate to LCD as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 27


LCD B Cover

LCD PCB

BACK LIGHT FPC

BACK LIGHTFPC

LCD FPC

LCD Insulator LCD PCBLCD GND Plate

LCDCN902

Take care not to extend onto the CN902.

LCD PCB

LCD KEY Ass’y

Pass through the hole.

LCD GND Plate

Spring section

Spring section

5. Insert into section A of the LCD B Cover and six ribs.

1.

2.

3.6.

Back Light Ass’y

LCD GND Plate

NO.31C Tape (9 ×14mm)


4.

Press

Rib

Drop

Press

A

LCD FPC

LCD Insulator

LCD GNDPlate

LCD KEY FPC

LCD B Cover

Align with the end of the LCD GND Plate.

Align with the end of the LCD Insulator.

Drop

Ribs

Ribs

Rib

Rib

Rib

Rib

Ribs




Attachment reference

After attaching NO.31C Tape, connect the LCD FPC.After soldering Back Light FPC, attach the NO.31C Tape.

Solder height: +1.2mm

Press the Back Light Ass’y against the Spring section of the LCD GND Plate, and engage it with six ribs.

Press the LCD against the Spring section of the LCD GND Plate, and engage it with rib.

Pass LCD Insulator between LCD PCB and LCD GND Plate.

Make LCD PCB hit against the rib of the LCD GND Plate and attach the LCD PCB.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

31

1-18 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit

Note 1 : Never turn the Hinge Bracket B on the Spring side of the Hinge Ass’y; keep it in a position where the LCD isopen all the time (to prevent lubricant from splashing).

(1) Disengage four claws A, and detach the Hinge T Cover and Hinge B Cover.(2) Detach the LCD FPC Ass’y.

Note 2 : When disassembling/reassembling the Panel Open Switch section of the LCD FPC Ass’y, be sure to keepthe SW Plate OFF (to prevent damage to the Panel Open Switch).

Fig. 28

Note 1 Note 2

Hinge B Cover

Hinge T Cover

(1)

(1)

Hinge Ass'y

LED FPC Ass'y

Hinge Bracket B

Spring

SW Plate(OFF

position)

(2)

Claws A

Claws A

Tweezers

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

32

<Note on Reassembling>(1) When using the LCD FPC Ass’y supplied as a service part, fold it as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the LCD FPC Ass’y as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the Hinge T Cover and Hinge B Cover as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>Winding part of LCD FPC Ass’y : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Fig. 29




Instruction for Supply

Hinge T Cover

Hinge B Cover

LCD FPC Ass'y

Fold it slightly.

Fold it slightly.



Double Sided TapeAttach in a trough-folded form.

Be sure to house the flexible cable within this range.

Wind 2-1/2turns

Panel Open Switch

Make sure that the Switch plate is in the OFF position and attach with respect to the dowel and hole.

Insert

Hole

Dowel

Switch Plate (OFF position)

Hanarl : KS-39M

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

33

1-19 Disassembly of CVF Battery Case Unit - 1

(1) Detach the AAS Connector Ass’y (by sliding).(2) Remove one screw (n × 1), and detach the Right Top Key and LED Key Window.(3) Remove three screws (e × 2, n × 1), and detach the Shoe Base.

Fig. 30

ne3mm

MetalM1.7

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

(3)

Shoe Base(2)

(2)

Right Top Key

LED key Window

(1)

AAS Connector Ass'y

(3) - e

(3) - e

(2) - n

(3) - n

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

34

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Shoe Base as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the LED Key Window as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the AAS Connector Ass’y as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 31




A

B

CVF FPC Ass'y

CVF FPC Ass'y

Shoe Base

Right Top Key

LED Key Window

Dowels

Dowels

Pass CVF FPC Ass'y through section A and B, position with respect to the dowel and attach the Shoe Base.

Take care not to damage the Right Top Key, position with respect to the cutout of the Right Top Key and attach the LED Key Window.

When attaching the CVF FPC Ass'y, perform positioning with dowels (with the contact part facing up) andslide.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

35


Note 1 : Since the CN4101 is Back flip connector, be careful when attaching/detaching the flexible cable.(1) Remove three screws (n × 3), disconnect the CN4101 and CN4102, and detach the CVF PCB and BATT Case Plate.

Note 2 : Take care not to deform the BATT Case Plate.(2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF FPC Ass’y.(3) Disengage two claws B, and detach the CVF Reflector, CVF Diffuser, CVF LCD Cushion, and CVF LCD section.(4) Disengage four claws C, and detach the CVF Panel Holder 2, CVF LCD, and CVF Panel Holder 1.

Note 3 : Since the CVF LCD is made entirely of glass, be careful handling it.

Fig. 32

n

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note 1

(1) (1)

CVF Reflector

CVF Diffuser

CVF LCD Cushion

CVF FPC Ass'y

CVF FPC Ass'y

BATT Case Plate

BATT Case Plate

Claws B

Claws A

Claws C

Claws C

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) - n

(1) - n

CN4102

CVF PCB

CVF PCB

CN4101

CN4101

CVF LCD section

CVF LCD

CVF Panel Holder 1

CVF Panel Holder 2

Open

Disconnect

(Back flipconnector)

(4)

Dowels D

Dowels E

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

36

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the CVF Panel Holder 2, CVF LCD, and CVF Panel Holder 1 as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the CVF Diffuser and CVF Reflector as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the CVF FPC Ass’y as shown in the figure below.(4) Attach the BATT Case Plate as shown in the figure below.(5) Attach the CVF PCB as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 33






CVF LCD

CVF LCD FPC

CVF LCD FPC

CVF LCD FPC

CVF LCD FPC

CVF FPC Ass’y

CVF Panel Holder 1

CVF Diffuser

CVF Diffuser

CVF LCD

F GCVF Panel Holder 2

Make it hit against the wall.

When attach the CVF Reflector, protrusion should be 0.3mm or shorter.

CVF Reflector

Less than +0.3mm

CN4102Claws B

Ribs

Bend

Dowels

Dowels E

Dowel D

Dowel D

Dowel H

Dowel H

Attach2.

Insert1.

The step difference sideshould face the CVF Panel Holder 1 side.

Engage the claw of the section F and dowels, push in the section G and hold the CVF FPC Ass’y.

Bend

Bend the CVF LCD FPC, position with respect to the ribs and push in claws B.

Pass the CVF FPC Ass’y and CVF LCD FPC through, insert into dowel E and engage dowel D.

Connect the CVF LCD FPC, position with respect to dowels H and attach the CVF PCB.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

37


(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Holder, CVF Knob Absorber, CVF Diopter Knob, and CVF Lens Holder.Note : Take care not to deform the CVF Holder.

(2) Disengage two claws B, and detach the Eyepiece Lens.

Fig. 34


Claws A

Claws B

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

Eyepiece Lens

CVF Lens Holder

CVF Holder

CVF Knob Absorber

CVF Diopter Knob

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

38

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Eyepiece Lens as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the CVF Diopter Knob and CVF Knob Absorber as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the CVF Holder as shown in the figure below.(4) To prevent intrusion of dust, attach the NO. 31C Tape as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>CVF Diopter Knob : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)CVF Knob Absorber : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)CVF BATT Case : NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)

Fig. 35




Note on Reassembling (4) Instruction for Supply

Claw A-2

Claw A-1

C

CVF Holder

CVF BATT Case

CVF Lens HolderCVF Lens Holder

CVF Knob AbsorberCVF Diopter Knob

CVF Knob Absorber

CVF Diopter Knob

Eyepiece Lens CVF BATTCase Rail section

Groove

Cover the hole completely.


Align the non-chamfered sections and attach.

Insert the CVF BATT Case Rail section into the groove.

Widen section C a little and engage claw A-1 and A-2 in this order. After attachment, check if the CVF Diopter Knob and CVF Lens Holder operates smoothly.



Hanarl : KS-39M

Entire sliding surface

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

39


(1) Remove three screws (o × 3), disengage two claws, and detach the Battery Terminal.(2) Unsolder (α) at three places, and detach the Battery Terminal Wire.(3) Remove one screw (n × 1), and detach the BATT Case Holder, BATT Lock Spring, BATT Lock Knob, and Reset Key.

Note : Take care not to lose the BATT Lock Spring.

Fig. 36

n o

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

3.5mmMetalM1.7

(self tap)

(2)(2)

(2)

(1)

(3)

BATT Case Holder

BATT Lock Spring

BATT Lock Knob

Battery Terminal

Battery Terminal Wire

CVF BATT Case

Reset Key

(3)

(1) - o

(3) - n

Claws

Solder (α)(Back side)

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

40

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Battery Terminal and Battery Terminal Wire as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the BATT Lock Knob, BATT Lock Spring, and BATT Case Holder as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>CVF BATT Case sliding rail section : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Fig. 37



Instruction for Supply

Battery Terminal Battery Terminal1.

2.

Contact section

Insert

Solder the Battery Terminal Wire, insert contact section into the hole, and attach the Battery Terminal.

Battery TerminalWire

Red

Yellow

Black

ClawsRib

Dowels

Rib

Boss

BATT Case HolderRail

BATT Lock SpringBATT Lock Knob

BATT Lock Knob

Shaft

CVF BATT Casesliding rail section

Hanarl : KS-39M

Solder (α) Contamination and deformation in the contact section are not allowed.

Fold at 90 or more and pass through the hole.

Fold over and solder.

Engage the two claws. After attachment, check if the Battery Terminal contact section operates smoothly.

Position with respect to the rail and boss and insert the BATT Lock Knob.

While pushing in the BATT Lock Spring, engage two dowels, rib, and shaft. After attachment, check if the BATT Lock Knob operates smoothly.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

41

1-23 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 1

Note 1 : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focue Ass’y. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Ass’y. Place so thatthe Auto Focus Ass’y faces upward.

(1) Remove three screws (e × 3), and detach the Rear Heatsink Plate and Heatsink.(2) Remove two screws (i × 2), detach the Lens Holder, and peel off the NO.31C Tape.

Note 2 : Take care not to deform the Lens Holder.(3) Remove one screw (g × 1), and detach the Top Frame Ass’y.

Note 3 : When removing the screws in the red frame on the illustration below, take care not to damage them. Whenreassembling them, use new ones.

Fig. 38

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

e3mm

MetalM1.7

g3mm

MetalM1.7

NK Setscrew

Note 1

(3)

(1)

(2)(2)

Top Frame Ass’y

Heatsink

Lens Holder

Rear Heatsink Plate

NO31C Tape(9 × 15mm)

(1) - e

(1) - e

(3) - g

(2) - i

(2) - i

Take care not to shake the Auto Focus Ass’y and take load.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

42

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the Top Frame Ass’y as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the NO.31C Tape and Lens Holder as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the Heatsink as shown in the figure below.

Fig. 39



Note on Reassembling (3)Top Frame Ass’y

Lens Unit Cover the three elements completely.

Dowel

Elements

InsertAttachment reference

Attachment reference

NO.31C Tape(9×15mm)

NO.31C Tape

Lens HolderScrewholes

B

A

Screwholes

Push against Push against

Attach the NO.31C Tape so that it covers the edge section of sheet metal ranging from the trough R up to the right edge of the round hole.

The Tape should fully cover the edge section of sheet metal ranging from the end point of the R to the center of the round hole.

Fold the remaining section of Tape to the back side. The section of Tape may come off.Put section A and B close against the Camera Unit

and align with the screw holes.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

43

1-24 Disassembly of Camera Unit - 2

Note 1 : Be careful not to shake the Auto Focus Ass’y. Also take care not to touch the Auto Focus Ass’y. Place so thatthe Auto Focus Ass’y faces upward.

(1) Remove two screws (p × 2), and detach the Auto Focus Ass’y.(2) Remove three screws (q × 3), and detach the CMOS Sensor Ass’y, Lens Spacer, CMOS Sensor Absorber, UV Filter, and Top Gasket.

Note 2 : When attaching/detaching the CMOS Sensor Ass’y, never apply too much force to the PCB. (For prevent theSensor from breaking away from the Ass’y)

(3) Detach the Lens Absorber and peel off the NO.31C Tape.

<Note on Reassembling>(1) Attach the IS FPC of Lens Unit as shown in the figure below.(2) Attach the NO.31C Tape as shown in the figure below.(3) Attach the Auto Focus Ass’y as shown in the figure below.

<Instruction for Supply>NO.31C Tape (DY9-3057-000)

Fig. 40

q5mm

MetalM1.4

(self tap)

p5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note on Reassembling (1),(2)


Face thickside towardLens side

UV Filter

Lens

CMOSSensor

UV Filter

Lens Spacer

Lens Absorber

CMOS Sensor Absorber

Lens Unit (3)

(3)

Auto Focus Ass’y

Auto Focus Ass’y

CMOS Sensor Ass’y

Top Gasket (1)

(2)

(2)



Attachment reference: ±1 mm

Attachment reference: Center of the sheet metal ±0.8mm

IS FPC

Fasten this screw first.

Edge of the backing(Back side of IS FPC)


(2) - q

(2) - q

(1) - p

Align IS FPC with the edge of the backing and fold it in a trough-folded form slightly.

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

44

1-25 Disassembly of Lens Unit

(1) Remove five screws (i × 4, l × 1), unsolder (α), and detach the IG Meter, PZ Motor, Photo-Interrupter, and SR Head.

Fig. 41

i4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

l3mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Photo-Interrupter

PZ Motor

SR Head

Hook

Hook

Dowel

IG MeterSR Head

Solder α

(1) - α

(1) - α

(1) - α

NO.31C Tape(8 ×16mm)

DowelsIG Meter RR FPC

Solder α

(1) - i(1) - i

(1) - i

(1) - l

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

45

1-26 List of Screws Used

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

Stepped Screw

M1.4-3.4mm (Metal)

XA1-3170-507

XA9-1167-000

XA9-0610-000

XA9-1772-000

M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)

XA4-9170-557

XA1-7170-257

XA9-1663-000

Self Tap

M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

M1.7-2.5mm (Bronze)

XA9-1706-000

YB1-0405-000Self Tap

M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

NK screw

M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)

Flat Head Screw

M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-407

Self Tap

M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)

M1.7-2.5mm (Metal)

XA9-1708-000

XA4-9170-407

M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)

XA4-9140-507

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

Self Tap

M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.4-5.0mm (Metal)

XA4-9170-357

XA4-9170-557

XA4-9170-507

PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUSTS

YM

BO

LPARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST

SY

MB

OL

4mm

4mm

4mm

4mm

5mm

3mm

3mm

3.4mm

2.5mm

5mm

3.5mm

5mm

3mm

2.5mm

3mm5.5mm

5.5mm

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

46

1-27 List of Disassembly Photos

Front Side

Top Side Bottom Side

Front Cover Unit R-LCD Unit

Right Side

HV20 EDISASSEMBLING

47

CVF Battery Unit

Camera Unit LCD Hinge Unit

LCD Unit

Camera Recorder Unit

SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

CONTENTS

1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

2. Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22-1 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22-2 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32-3 Setting C ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 53-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 63-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 84-1 SD Specification Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 84-2 HD Specification Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 94-3 Mechanical Error Indication ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-3-1 Indications in Service Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 104-3-2 Indications in Shortcut Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-4 Cleaning Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 114-5 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 114-6 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124-7 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

4-7-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 134-7-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 134-7-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144-7-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 155-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 155-2 CMOS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17

5-2-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 175-2-2 FPG Compensation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

5-3 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 195-3-1 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 195-3-2 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205-3-3 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205-3-4 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205-3-5 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 205-3-6 CMOS Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21

5-4 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 245-4-1 VCM Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 255-4-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 265-4-3 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26

5-5 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 275-5-1 Hall Element Offset Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 285-5-2 Hall Element Gain Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 305-5-3 Hall Element Offset Readjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 325-5-4 GYRO GAIN Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 335-5-5 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 335-5-6 Flash Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33

5-6 AF Sensor Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 345-6-1 FPN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 355-6-2 Shading Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 365-6-3 Linearity Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 375-6-4 Linearity Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 405-7-1 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 405-7-2 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 405-7-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 405-7-4 Flash Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41

5-8 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 425-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43

5-9-1 HDV Joint Record ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 435-9-2 FF/REW Search ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 435-9-3 Checking the Playback Error rate ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 435-9-4 HDV (MPEG-2 TS) Input / Output --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 445-9-5 Linearity Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 455-9-6 Parallax Confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46

5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 485-10-1 Parallax Confirmation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48

IS adjustment chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50Parallax confirmation chart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51

HV20 ESERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT

1

1. Maintenance Tools

1-1 List of Maintenance Tools

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks Alignment Tape, (Color bar master/PAL) DY9-1381-000 Recorder electrical adjustment

Alignment Tape (tracking) DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DMC IIICassette Torque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC III

DV Cleaning Tape (hard) DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DMC IIIDriver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 Tape path adjustment DMC III

Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment Color Viewer 5600° K for 220V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220V)

Color Viewer 5600° K for 240V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240V)Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement

Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment

Cassette for changeover to service mode DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustmentExtension Flexible cable (20pin) DY9-1387-000 Test pin extended

CHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY DY9-1421-000 AF sensor electrical adjustmentExtension connector (20pin) DY9-1426-000 Test pin extended NEW

CHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY DY9-1427-000 AF sensor electrical adjustment NEW


2

2. Setting(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state.(2) Check of Envelope: Carry out at setting A.(3) Tracking, check of tape running system and cleaning of tape running system: Carry out at setting B.(4) P7 adjustment: Carry out at setting C.

2-1 Setting A

Envelope Check)

(1) Detach the Service Cover.(2) Connect the extension connector (DY9-1426-000) and ex-

tension flexible cable (DY9-1387-000) to CN2900.(3) Observe the PB-RF waveform output from the extension flex-

ible cable.

Pin No. Signal Designation

19 SWP

7,18,21 GND

23 PBRF

Extension f lexible cable (DY9-1387-000)

Fig. 1

DY9-1387-000


3

2-2 Setting B

(1) Remove the BOTTOM COVER referring to “Disassembling”.Note : When carrying out tracking adjustment, refer to “5-8 Tape Path Adjustment" (p. 42). In envelope observation,

check the PB-RF signal output from the extension flexible cable that has been attached in 2-1 "Setting A".

Fig. 2

BOTTOM COVER

ADJUSTMENT DRIVER(DY9-2053-000)

×6

×2


4

2-3 Setting C

(1) Remove the BOTTOM COVER, TOP COVER ASS'Y, FRONT COVER UNIT, R-LCD UNIT, CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y, CARDPCB, CVF BATTERY CASE UNIT, CAMER UNIT referring to “Disassembling”.Note 1 : Please perform an electric discharge of a capacitor before setting.Note 2 : Referring to Fig.3, connect the required cables.Note 3 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A.Note 4 : For ejection, open and close the MAIN HOLDER ASS'Y. For mode transition, use the wireless remote control-

ler.

Fig. 3

WIRELESS CONTROLLER

CA-570

CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y

MONITOR TV

MAIN PCBCN102

CARD PCBCN104

CARD PCBCN100


5

3. Service Modes

3-1 Outline

(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2)* The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the

remote controller (ex. WL-D82) furnished with a conventional product.(2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000), extension connector

(DY9-1426-000), and an extension flexible cable (DY9-1387-000) are required in addition to the wireless remote controller.(3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the “Audio dubbing” and “SLOW” keys of the

wireless remote controller.As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the “CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE” is removed.

(4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be done using the keys on the main unit and the remote controlmode 1.

(5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled.(6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.

3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Referring to Fig.1, connect the extension connector and ex-tension flexible cable,set the cassette for changeover to ser-vice mode (DY9-1386-000) in the equipment and load thedata.

(2) Press the “Dubbing” key on a wireless remote controller thatis set at Remote controller code 2.* To change over to Remote controller code 2, press

“Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys si-multaneously for 2 sec.

* The remote controller code setting on the DVC mainunit is operable both at remote controller codes 1and 2.

(3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completedand the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen.

* Pressing the “SLOW” key performs the changeoverto the normal mode from the service mode.As long as the power supply is ON, the service modeis available by setting the “Audio dubbing” key evenif the cassette for transfer to service mode is re-moved.

* After the completion of repairs, press the Reset but-ton to release the service mode completely.

Fig. 4

DY9-1386-000

Fig. 5


6

3-3 How to Operate the Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2.* To change over to Remote controller code 2, press the “Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys simulta-

neously for 2 sec.* The remote controller furnished with the instrument cannot transfer to the service mode. For this purpose, use the

remote controller (ex. WL-D82) furnished with a conventional product.

Fig. 6

3. START/STOP

2. SLOW 1. DUBBING

5. SEARCH −

4. SEARCH +

8. FF

11. PLAY

6. FRAME +

14. × 2

12. STOP

10. SEARCH SELECT

9. REW

7. FRAME −

13. PAUSE

Remote ControllerCode 2 setting

WL-D82

No. Key Designation (in Normal Mode) Key Designation (in Service Mode) Function

1 DUBBING SERVICE MODE Change over to service mode

2 SLOW NORMAL MODE Change over to normal mode

3 START/STOP CS+ Increases CS by 1.

4 SEARCH + FUNCTION + Increases FUNCTION by 1.

5 SEARCH − FUNCTION − Decreases FUNCTION by 1.

6 FRAME + HIGH ADDRESS + Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.

7 FRAME − HIGH ADDRESS − Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.

8 FF ADDRESS + Increases ADDRESS by 1.

9 REW ADDRESS − Decreases ADDRESS by 1.

10 SEARCH SELECT MODE SELECT Change over to RD/WR mode

11 PLAY DATA + Increases DATA by 1.

12 STOP DATA − Decreases DATA by 1.

13 PAUSE STORE Defines/w rites DATA.

14 ×2 EJECT Performs EJECT.


7

3-4 Indications in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.

1. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (“SERV”)2. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)3. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.)4. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~7)5. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)6. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)7. DT : Indicates, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)8. Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)9. Indicates the absolute track No.10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup)11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup)12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM.13. Indicates the version of the CCM MI-COM.14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the flash memory mounted outside the CCM MI-COM.15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the flash memory mounted outside the CCM MI-COM.16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head.17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head.18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution)19. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: OK in adjustment result, 09: NG in adjustment result)*

* The numeric value indicated varies depending on the adjustment item concerned.

Fig. 7

14

2

3

5 6

7

8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16 17

18

19


8

4. Description of Service Modes

4-1 SD Specification Error Rate

<Outline>

(1) The error rate specification differs between SD specification and HD specification.

SD Specification Error Rate

(1) VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and AUDIO error ratecan be checked.

(2) Note that the error rate is worsened due to failure in taperunning, tape deterioration, decreases in head output, fail-ures the in head amplifier circuit, improper drum shield, etc.

<How to read the VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-cated in exponential representation.

Example) ‘25’ is indicated:Error rate = 2 × 10 -5

ImportantAfter checking, set the DT to the product setting. Press the STORE key at (STEP 1 -PROCEDURE 1).

<Indications in VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

<How to read the AUDIO error rate>

To read the error rate of an AUDIO tracks, follow the proce-dures in the table below.The number of erroneous sync blocks out of 64-track AUDIOsync blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.(FF limitation is imposed on values exceeding 255.)

Example) ‘23’is indicated:Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35


<Change to an AUDIO error rate>

In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-nels in self-recording LP playback is as follows :

Error rate =28H or less(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)

Fig. 8

Low ch. High ch. EO 2 5 E1

2 × 10-5

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operationCS Function ADDR MODE DT

1 1) Set as shown right. 0 10 00B4 ST 002) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD 01 Video + Audio error rate indication

MONITOR


1 1) Set as shown right. 0 10 001D ST 00 03 Product setting 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD 03 Audio error rate indication Remarks) Restoring DT back to "00"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.

MONITOR

Fig. 9

Low ch. High ch.

(hexadecimal)

(decimal)

AO 2 3 A1

2

(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35

3


9

4-2 HD Specification Error Rate

<Outline>

(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) can be checked.(2) Note that the error rate is worsened due to failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure in head

amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.

Note) The error rate for AUDIO only cannot be indicated.

<How to read the VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-cated in exponential representation.

Example) ‘25’ is indicated:Error rate = 2 × 10 -5


<Indications in VIDEO + AUDIO error rate>

Fig. 10

Low ch. High ch. EO 2 5 E1

2 × 10-5


1 1) Set as shown right. 0 10 00B4 ST 002) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD 01 Video + Audio error rate indication

MONITOR


10

4-3 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>

On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode and shortcut mode. Two typesof indications are made: the current error data indication, and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V.* In the shortcut mode, the conditions of each error can be checked without using the service cassette.

4-3-1 Indications in Service Mode

The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.

4-3-2 Indications in Shortcut Mode

<Display Procedure>

(1) Turn power off.(2) Reverse the LCD panel to close it.(3) While holding down the Photo button and the START/STOP button, turn power on in the card playback mode.

Fig. 12

Indications are provided in two hexadecimal digits. Through conversion to eight binary digits, the conditions of each error can be checked as shown below.

bit 7bit 6bit 5bit 4bit 3bit 2bit 1bit 0

High

Low

: TAPE END (E): TAPE TOP (B): DRUM ERROR (D): CAPSTAN ERROR (C): S-REEL ERROR (S): T- REEL ERROR (T): LOADING MOTOR ERROR (L): DEW ERROR (D)

Present error data. Error history data backed up by LITHIUM 3 V battery.

Fig. 11

EBDCSTLD

: TAPE END: TAPE TOP: DRUM ERROR: CAPSTAN ERROR: S-REEL ERROR: T- REEL ERROR: LOADING MTR ERROR: DEW ERROR

Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.


1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 08 0008 ST 002) Perform storing. RD Reset completion of backup data. (Press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR


11

4-4 Cleaning Mode

On this product, setting cleaning tape automatically transfers to (and allows to exit from) the cleaning mode.Note : Do not set hard type cleaning tape at FULL BOT status, lest the head wear excessively.

4-5 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>

(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation.(2) Make preparations according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to the camera.(3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the “ST” mode.

Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation CAM SPECIAL COMMAND CS Function ADDR MODE DT

WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3300 ST --2) Perform storing. RD -- WB is set. (Press the PAUSE button.)

WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3301 ST --LOCK 2) Perform storing. RD -- WB is locked.

(Press the PAUSE button.)WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3302 ST --TURBO 2) Perform storing. RD -- WB high-speed setting mode

(Press the PAUSE button.)WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3303 ST --OUTDOOR 2) Perform storing. RD -- WB outdoor mode

(Press the PAUSE button.)WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3304 ST --INDOOR 2) Perform storing. RD -- WB indoor mode

(Press the PAUSE button.)IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3305 ST --OPEN 2) Perform storing. RD -- The iris is opened forcibly.

(Press the PAUSE button.)IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3306 ST --CLOSE 2) Perform storing. RD -- The iris is closed forcibly.

(Press the PAUSE button.)AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3309 ST --MAX 2) Perform storing. RD -- A value of AGC gain is maximized.

(Press the PAUSE button.)AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330A ST --MIN 2) Perform storing. RD -- A value of AGC gain is minimized.

(Press the PAUSE button.)COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330B ST --BAR 2) Perform storing. RD -- Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.

(Press the PAUSE button.)White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330C ST --100% 2) Perform storing. RD -- Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.

(Press the PAUSE button.)White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330D ST --50% 2) Perform storing. RD -- Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV.

(Press the PAUSE button.)BLACK & 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330F ST -- Outputs white & black chart WHITE 2) Perform storing. RD -- from DIGIC DV.

(Press the PAUSE button.)GRAY 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3310 ST --SCALE 2) Perform storing. RD -- Outputs gray scale from DIGIC DV.

(Press the PAUSE button.)WHITE 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 331F ST -- Forces the white LED to light.LED ON 2) Perform storing. RD --

(Press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR


12

4-6 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Outline>

(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can checkwhether lens resetting has been completed or not.* In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset.* In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.* In case of D4, the resetting of the zoom lens and focus lens has been completed.


1 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 312E RD -- RAM data indicat ion

MONITOR

Fig. 13


13

4-7 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Outline>

(1) The MODE, FR terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the connectionsbetween the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state.

(2) Perform the check in the RD mode.

4-7-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port

4-7-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDRDATABIT

Description

P6 MF CW SW MF Dial 1 01 000B 6 "L" when ONU3 MF CCW SW MF Dial 1 01 000B 7 "L" when ONJ4 SCN POW SW MODE SELECT SW detection 1 01 0019 5 "L" when ONJ3 CARD DET Memory card loading detection 1 01 0019 4 "L" for memory card

loadingN1 HALF PHOTO SW Halfway pressing of Photo SW 1 01 000E 5 "L" when ONU11 PHOTO SW Full pressing of Photo SW 1 01 0011 5 "L" when ONP1 START/STOP SW Start / Stop SW 1 01 000E 4 "L" when ONP3 BARRSW 1 Barrier closing SW 1 01 000A 3 "L" at detectionR2 BARRSW 2 Barrier opening SW 1 01 000A 1 "L" at detectionE16 CAM POW SW POWER SW detection 1 01 0014 1 "L" when ONE14 CAS IN Cassette IN SW detection 1 01 0014 5 "L" when ONB12 EJECT SW EJECT SW detection 1 01 0014 4 "L" when OND16 VTR POW SW POWER SW detection 1 01 0014 2 "L" when ONC16 T/C POW SW Tape / Card SW 1 01 0014 3 "H" when TapeG13 DC J DET DC JACK detection 1 01 0014 7 "H" for memory card

loadingK1 P POW SW MODE SELECT SW detection 1 01 0019 0 "L" when ON

B8 KEY AD4 Switch Detection 1 02 0005

A6 KEY AD3 Switch Detection 1 02 000B F.ASSIST(84) FOCUS(3F) REW(00)C5 KEY AD2 Switch Detection 1 02 000A DIRECTPRINT SW(3F) DISP/LCD(00)B5 KEY AD1 Switch Detection 1 02 0009 Cross top(84) Cross under(3F) FUNC(00)A5 KEY AD0 Switch Detection 1 02 0008 SET(84) Cross left(3F) Cross right(00)C4 ZOOM AD ZOOM KEY output 1 02 0015 TELE (00) CENTER WIDE (FF)C7 BATT TEMP Battery Temperature Detection 1 02 0002 High (00) Low (FF)A7 BATT A/D Battery Voltage Detection 1 02 0000 High (FF) Low (00)

STOP/INDEX/DRIVE MODE(00)

Function ADDR

FF/+(84) PLAY/PAUSE/STROBE(3F)

AD DATA (00~FF)PIN NAME Description CS


14

4-7-3 FR MI-COM Input Port

4-7-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port

Low HighH23 DEW AD DEW detection 0 02 0004 Low (00) High (FF)K27 I ENC IRIS encorder 0 02 0005 Low (00) High (FF)H22 ND ENC ND encorder 0 02 0006 Small diap hragm Open

AD DATA (00~FF)Function ADDRPIN NAME Description CS

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDRDATABIT

Description

F15 REC PROOF Tape recording prohibition 0 01 000A 7 "L" at detectionAC3 PANEL OPEN SW Panel open SW 0 01 000A 4 "H" when openAE5 PANEL BT SW Panel reverse SW 0 01 0003 6 "L" when reversingB11 AV JACK DET AV mini JACK detection 0 01 0004 0 "L" at detectionV1 EXT DET External MIC detection 0 01 000A 3 "L" at detection


15

5. Adjustment Procedures

5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement

After replacement of major parts, perform adjustments referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows theminimum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. If two or more parts have been replaced or any faultycondition has occurred, make required adjustments accordingly.

NOTE)

(1) Before turning on power to the main unit, prepare the tools necessary for a series of adjustment steps and make settings as required.Thus, you can perform the adjustment items in succession without having to make preparations before each adjustment item.

(2) After turning on power to the main unit, make adjustments in the order indicated in the Service Manual. Make adjustmentssuccessively wherever possible.

Adjustment Items in Parts Replacement : Adjustment required

Camera system

Part nameNo. Adjustment item

LensAUDIOFOCUSASS'Y

CMOSSENSOR

ASS'Y

MAINPCB

CVFPCB

ASS'Y

Adjustment setting

5-2 CMOS Section

5-2-1 Iris Adjustment Product state

5-2-2 FPG Compensation Product state

5-3 Camera Section

5-3-1 WB Adjustment (1) Product state

5-3-2 Color Balance Adjustment Product state



5-3-5 Flash Memory Writing Product state

5-3-6 CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation Product state

5-4 AF Section

5-4-1 VCM Adjustment Product state

5-4-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment Product state

5-4-3 Cam Correction (AUTO) Product state

5-5 IS Section

5-5-1 Hall Element Offset Adjustment Product state

5-5-2 Hall Element Gain Adjustment Product state

5-5-3 Hall Element Offset Readjustment Product state

5-5-4 GYRO GAIN Adjustment Product state

5-5-5 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data Product state

5-5-6 Flash Writing Product state

5-6 AF Sensor

5-6-1 FPN Adjustment Product state

5-6-2 Shading Adjustment Product state

5-6-3 Linearity Adjustment Product state

5-6-4 Linearity Confirmation Product state


16

: Adjustment required

Recorder system

Part nameNo. Adjustment item

MAINPCB

DMC IIIAdjustment setting

5-7 Recorder Section

5-7-1 SWP Adjustment Product state(or Recorder adjustment setting)

5-7-2 C. FG Adjustment Product state(or Recorder adjustment setting)

5-7-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG Product state(or Recorder adjustment setting)

5-7-4 Flash Writing Product state(or Recorder adjustment setting)

DMC III

5-8 Tape Path Adjustment Tape Path Adjustment setting

Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement : Adjustment required

Part name

No. Adjustment itemMAINPCB

AUDIOFOCUSASS'Y

LENSCMOS

SENSORASS'Y

DMC IIIAdjustment setting

5-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement

5-9-1 HDV Joint Record Product state

5-9-2 FF/REW Search Product state

5-9-3 Checking the Playback Error rate Product state

5-9-4 HDV (MPEG-2 TS) Input / Output Product state

5-9-5 Linearity Confirmation Product state

5-9-6 Parallax Confirmation Product state

5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user

5-10-1 Parallax Confirmation Product state

Note) The Main circuit board for service is factory adjusted. Thus only upon a request from the customer, perform check and/or adjustment.


17

5-2 CMOS Section Adjustment

5-2-1 Iris Adjustment

Preparation)

(1) Make adjustments to the IRIS section in the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : OFFZOOM : Wide-angle endDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

CHART Not required

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out IRIS adjustment.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3000 00 Iris adjustment.2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3001 00 Writing of iris adjustment data 2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

MONITOR

Fig. 14

STST

IRIS 1 IRIS 2


18

5-2-2 FPG Compensation

Note)

Take care that there is no dust on the Light Box, no surrounding objects mirrored on the main body of product lens, no incident lightfrom the surroundings. If all of these conditions are not met, satisfactory performance cannot be obtained.

Preparation)

(1) Make adjustments to the FPG section in the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeZOOM : Wide-angle endAF : Closest MFDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

CHART LIGHT BOX (5600°K)


Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out FPG adjustment.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation FPG CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3017 00 FPG compensation2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3014 00 Writing of FPG compensasion data2) Perform storing. RD Completion with ST:05 (Other NG) (press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR

Fig. 15

ST ST


19

5-3 Camera Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) Be sure to consecutively perform each adjustment of WB in section 5-3-1 to 5-3-4 in order shortly after turning on the power of theMAIN UNIT. (In principle, perform them within 10 minutes after power-on.) Independent adjustment is insufficient to obtainenough performance.

(2) Each adjustment of WB in section 5-3-1to 5-3-4 is enabled by carrying out Flash memory writing in section 5-3-5. When turning off/on the power during adjustment, be sure to perform “5-3-5: Flash memory writing” beforehand.

Preparation)

(1) Make adjustments to the Camera section in the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : OFFZOOM : Wide-angle end (An angle of view to completely come out to right and left edge of a chart)Digital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

5-3-1 WB Adjustment (1)

CHART Light box (5600°K)


Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform WB (1) adjustment.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation WB (1) CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 10 ST 1044 00 Target value reset.2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.)




5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3002 --2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD -- Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

MONITOR


20

5-3-2 Color Balance Adjustment

CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart


Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform color balance automatic adjustment.


CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter


Procedure)





Procedure)


5-3-5 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Data writing

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, perform flash writing.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation FLASH WRITING CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3006 --2) Perform storing. WR Writing of adjustment data. (press the PAUSE button.) RD Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

MONITOR


1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3004 --2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is in progress. Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD Completion with ST:05 (Other NG)

MONITOR



MONITOR

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation COLOR BALANCE CS Function MD ADDR DT


MONITOR


21

5-3-6 CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation

Note)

(1) In this camcorder, it is also possible to make compensation for black dots.(2) Up to 300 white dots and up to 212 black dots can be corrected. If more than the above number are detected in adjustment, the

result of adjustment is indicated as NG and the correction is not performed. Further, if three consecutive missing pixels in a row aredetected, the correction is not performed either.

(3) The number of white dot increases with the temperature of the CMOS, causing a change in detectable level. If the adjustment isperformed after a lapse of time longer than the specified period of power-on, the temperature of the CMOS becomes higher than apreset temperature level to result in an increase in the number of white dots detected. In this situation, CMOS Missing PixelCompensation cannot be made properly.

(4) In addition to the CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation function mentioned above, this product is provided with a function forautomatically correcting missing pixel points each time power is turned on and a function for automatically correcting missing pixelpoints at the time of shooting at a dark object (interlinked with AGC level adjustment).


SPEC. Automatic writing

Preparation)

(1) Carry out compensation for CMOS missing pixel in the product state.(2) Adjustment conditions

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : Closest MFZOOM : Telephoto-endDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFF

Procedure)

(1) According to the table shown below, carry out CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation. (Perform this step about 30 minutes afterpower-on.)

(2) If the result of adjustment is NG (status 09), refer to the error code table shown below.Furthermore, by observing an actual image, check for stuck/void pixels. Then, judge whether the result of adjustment is OK or NG.(In the case of NG, replace the CMOS SENSOR Ass’y with a new one.)

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300E -- Blemish detected 2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05, NG with ST:09

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300F -- Blemish detection data writing 2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05, NG with ST:09

MONITOR


22

Confirmation of total number of dots

(1) Referring to the table below, check the number of white dots and black dots detected, respectively.

Fig. 16

Black dotsWhite dots

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation FPG CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 06 ST 001A --2) Perform storing. RD Display of total number of white dots and black dots (press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR

Fig. 17

STATUS code Error code (bit)


23

Error Code Table for CMOS Missing Pixel Compensation

Error No Error Conditions

00 Normal end (Less than 212 black dots, Less than 300 white dots)

01 The number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first t ime of detection (212 points or more detected).

02 The number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (212 points or more detected).

04 The total number of black dots in the first t ime and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit (212 points or more detected).

08 In black dot detection, a maladjustment of AE has been found.

10 The number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first t ime of detection (300 points or more detected).

20 The number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (300 points or more detected).

40 The total number of white dots in the first t ime and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit (300 points or more detected).

80 In white/black dot detection, three consecutive missing pixels in a row are detected.


24

5-4 AF Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) Perform “5-4-2: CZ automatic adjustment” shortly after turning on the power (within 5 minutes in principle).(2) The sections 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are

performed independently, sufficient performance cannot be obtained.Also, when section 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) must beexecuted immediately without delay. If section 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after time has passed since completionof section 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment, sufficient performance cannot be obtained.

(3) When it is required to make the CZ automatic adjustment shortly, do it after performing the IRIS adjustment of the CMOS sectionand the FPG adjustment in section 5-2-1 to 5-2-2 and “5-5-1: Hole element offset adjustment” of the IS section.

Preparation)

(1) Make adjustments to the AF section in the product state.(2) CZ adjustment and cam correction conditions (initial state)

Tape/Card : TapeShooting mode : Program AEZOOM : Telephoto-endCZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens frontChart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)Digital Zoom : OFFAuto slow shutter : OFF


25

5-4-1 VCM Adjustment


Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out VCM adjustment.

Fig. 18

ST

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation Preparation for VCM adjustment CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3119 002) Perform storing. RD It will take about ten seconds (press the PAUSE button.) OK with ST : 19

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 311A --2) Perform storing. RD AA Correction value calculation. (press the PAUSE button.) OK with ST : AA, NG with ST : FE

3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 002) Perform storing. RD Operation of flash update of FR microcomputer. (press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR


26

5-4-2 CZ Automatic Adjustment

CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. At STEP 3, ST : AA should be attained.

Procedure)

(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.(3) Perform the cam correction.

5-4-3 Cam Correction (AUTO)

CHART CZ adjustment chart


Procedure)

(1) Confirm that a zoom position is a telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped, perform the cam correction by following thetable below.

(2) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AFOFF).

(3) If the result is NG, perform 5-4-2 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-4-3 : Cam correction (AUTO).

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operationCZ CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3110 002) Perform storing. RD 10 Move to adjustment mode. (press the PAUSE button.)

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3100 --2) Perform storing. Automatic adjustment is started. Then, it is (press the PAUSE button.) completed in approximately 30 seconds. If any NG

condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,check the parts inside the lens section.

3 Judgement on result of adjustment 2 08 RD 3100 AA Adjustment is completed (ST=AA : OK).Perform the cam correction.

RD FF Adjustment is completed (ST=FF : NG).Turn the power off and then back on. Then makereadjustment.

MONITOR

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operationCAM CORRECTION CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3101 002) Perform storing. RD 01 (press the PAUSE button.)

23 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3102 00

WR2) Perform storing. RD 02 Correction value measurement. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:02.

4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3104 002) Perform storing. RD 04 Correction value calculation. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:04.

5 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3105 002) Perform storing. RD AA Completion of correction value writing. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:AA.

Confirm that the center of a chart is matched with the center of a monitor.

MONITOR


27

5-5 IS Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) When it is required to make “5-5-4: gyro gain adjustment” independently, do it after performing “5-4-2: CZ automatic adjustment”.(2) Each adjustment is enabled by carrying out Flash memory writing. Before turning off/on the power during adjustment, be sure to

make Flash memory writing.

Preparation)(1) Make IS adjustments in the product state.(2) Make adjustment on a tripod or a stable desk.(3) Adjustment conditions

Program AE : Auto modeIS adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02m from lens front

(Prepare the IS adjustment chart by copying it from P.50 of this manual and using it for adjustment.)(4) For adjustment, set the DEMO MODE menu item to OFF beforehand.

<Preparation for IS adjustment>

Fig. 19

IS CHART

2.4m±0.02mSETTING


28

5-5-1 Hall Element Offset Adjustment

CHART IS adjustment chart (attached with this manual)

SPEC. Align the shift lens amplitude center with center

Procedure)

(1) Fasten the camera and align the chart center with the monitor center (field angle is arbitrary).(2) According to the following table, move the chart respectively. At ADDR : 3204/3205, adjust the chart center to the shift center.

(Continued to next page.)

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation IS OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 50 ST 005C 332) Press the STORE key. RD3) Make the setting shown at right. ST 005D 004) Press the STORE key. RD5) Make the setting shown at right. 48 ST 320A 026) Press the STORE key. RD Ends the Hall element offset adjustment setting.

2 Hall element YAW offset adjustment.2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 01

2) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves to the center of chart on the monitor. right of screen.

2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 022) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves to the center of chart on the monitor. left of screen.

2-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 002) Press the STORE key. RD Shift Lens returns to initial position.

2-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3204 ADJ2) Change the DT so that the chart "ADJ" center will be at the center of marks put in STEPS 2-1 and 2-2.3) Press the STORE key. RD

MONITOR


29

(Continued from the previous page)


3 Hall element PITCH offset adjustment3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 03

2) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward the center of chart on the monitor. top of screen.

3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 042) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward the center of chart on the monitor. bottom of screen.



4 Adjustmen settingt release4-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 00

2) Press the STORE key. RD Completion of adjustment setting release.5 Flash writing5-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320F 00

2) Press the STORE key. RD -- Completion of EEP writing.5-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 48 ST 0081 00

2) Press the STORE key. RD Completion of Flash writing.

MONITOR


30

5-5-2 Hall Element Gain Adjustment

CHART IS adjustment chart (attached with this manual)

SPEC. Adjust the Shift Lens amplitude to the circumference of the chart.

Procedure)

(1) Fasten the camera and align the chart center with the monitor center (field angle is arbitrary).(2) According to the following table, move the chart for aligning the circumference of chart with mark put on the monitor.


STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation IS GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 032) Press the STORE key. RD Ends the Hall element gain adjustment setting.3) Mark the center of chart on the monitor.

2 Hall element YAW gain adjustment2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 -- Shift Lens moves, and the chart shifts

2) Change DT so that the marking on the "ADJ" leftward with respect to the center. monitor will be aligned with the circle on the chart.3) Press the STORE key. RD

2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3204 -- Shift Lens returns to the center position.2) If the marking on the monitor deviates "ADJ" from the center of the chart, change DT to attain center alignment.3) Press the STORE key. RD

2-3 1) Carry out steps 2-1 and 2-2 repetitively to eliminate deviation between the chart and marking.

2-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 --2) Press the STORE key, and then write MD. Shift Lens moves to shift the chart Check that the marking on the monitor rightward with respect to the center. is almost aligned with the circle on the chart. If the result of check is OK’d go to step 3.

MONITOR


31


STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation IS GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT

3 Hall element PITCH gain adjustment3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 -- Shift Lens moves to shift the chart on the

2) Change DT so that the marking on the "ADJ" monitor downward with respect to the center. monitor will be aligned with the circle on the chart.3) Press the STORE key. RD

3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3205 -- Shift Lens returns to the center position.2) If the marking on the monitor deviates "ADJ" from the center of the chart, change DT to attain center alignment.3) Press the STORE key. RD

3-3 1) Carry out steps 2-1 and 2-2 repetitively to eliminate deviation between the chart and marking.

3-4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 --2) Press the STORE key, and then write MD. ST Shift Lens moves to shift the chart Check that the marking on the monitor on the monitor upward with respect is almost aligned with the circle on the to the center. chart. If it is OK, quit.

4 Adjustment setting release4-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 00


2) Press the STORE key. RD Completion of EEP writing.5-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 00


MONITOR


32

5-5-3 Hall Element Offset Readjustment



1 Hall element YAW offset adjustment.1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 02

2) Press the STORE key. RD3) Make the setting shown at right. ST 320B 014) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves to the center of chart on the monitor. right of screen.

1-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 022) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves to the center of chart on the monitor. left of screen.



2 Hall element PITCH offset adjustment2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 03

2) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward the center of chart on the monitor. top of screen.

2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320B 042) Press the STORE key and mark RD Shift Lens moves and chart moves toward the center of chart on the monitor. bottom of screen.



MONITOR


33


5-5-4 GYRO GAIN Adjustment

SPEC. Data Writing

Procedure)

(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.

5-5-5 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data

SPEC. Automatic adjusutment

Procedure)

(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.

Note)

It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).

5-5-6 Flash Writing


3 Adjustment setting release3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 00


2) Press the STORE key. RD -- Completion of EEP writing.4-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 48 ST 0081 00


MONITOR

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation GYRO GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3200 6C

2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.)

2 Gyro PITCH gain adjustment2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3201 7D

2) Perform storing. RD Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320D 002) Perform storing. RD -- Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) Completion with DT:05, NG with ST:09

MONITOR

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation Flash Writing CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320F 002) Press the STORE key. RD -- Completion of EEP writing.

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 002) Press the STORE key. RD Completion of Flash writing.

MONITOR


34

5-6 AF Sensor Adjustment

Preparation)

(1) Make FPN Adjustment and Shading Adjustment in the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : High speed AFZOOM : Wide-angle endDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

<AF sensor adjustment preparation>

Procedure)

(1) Keep the camera shooting the LIGHT BOX. Note : Place the product near the LIGHT BOX.

(2) Display the output waveform from the AF sensor on the LCD panel in the service mode.

Fig. 20

Output waveform from the AF sensor (A image) Output waveform from the AF sensor (B image)

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation Output wave form CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 002) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD The output waveform from he AF sensor is indicated.

MONITOR


35

5-6-1 FPN Adjustment

<FPN adjustment preparation>

CHART Not required


Procedure)

(1) Shield the AF sensor from light so that the output level of the output waveform from the AF sensor is zero.(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out FPN adjustment.

Fig. 21

Completely cover the HH AF sensor sectionwith cloth so that light will not enter.

HH AF sensor section

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation FPN CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3151 00 Adjustment is in progress.2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD 52 Writing of adjustment data.

Completion with ST:52 (NG : FF)

MONITOR


36

5-6-2 Shading Adjustment

CHART LIGHT BOX (5600°K)


Procedure)

(1) Place the product in front of the LIGHT BOX. (Place it at a position up to 4cm from the LIGHT BOX.)(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out shading adjustment.STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation

SHADING CS Function MD ADDR DT1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3152 00 Adjustment is in progress.

2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is completed. (press the PAUSE button.) RD 53 Writing of adjustment data.

Completion with ST:53 (NG : FF)

MONITOR

Fig. 22

ST AF sensor output level (zero)

Fig. 23

ST AF sensor output level (flat)


37

5-6-3 Linearity Adjustment

Note)

Perform “5-6-3: Linearity adjustment” shortly after turning on the power to the MAIN UNIT (within 10 to 15 minutes in principle).

Preparation)

(1) Make Linearity Adjustment in the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : High speed AFZOOM : Standard angle of viewLinearity adjustment chart : Make adjustment at each distance from the front surface of the lens shown below.CHART brightness : EV 11 or moreDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

(3) ToolCHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY (DY9-1421-000, DY9-1427-000)(DY9-1421-000 consists of the following three as a set. The following chart name is shown at the upper left on the chart.)• CHART A 2900mm• CHART D 800mm

<Linearity adjustment preparation> Supplemental Information)

CHART CHART, AF SENSOR LINEARITY (DY9-1421-000, DY9-1427-000)


Fig. 24

CHART A 2900mmCHART D 800mm

CHART A : 2.9m(−7.7cm, +5.8cm) CHART D : 0.8m(−0.5cm, +0.5cm)

Distance between the exterior coverand the lens surface : 0.7cm


38

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity adjustment.

Error bit AF Sensor Area

7 Right2

6 Right1

5 Center

4 Left1

3 Left2

2 0

1 0

0 0

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation LINEARITY CS Function MD ADDR DT

11-11-21-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3160 00 Adjustment is in progress.


Completion with ST:61 (Other NG : Refer to the error bit table.)

22-12-22-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3162 00 Adjustment is in progress.


Completion with ST:63 (Other NG : Refer to the error bit table.)

Place the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens.Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 25.

AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mm

MONITOR

AF sensor linearity adjustment 2900mmPlace the Chart A 2900mm at a position 2.9m (-7.7cm, +5.8cm) apart from the front side of lens.Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 25.

Fig. 25

Error bit

Center of a monitorC waveform (A image)

L2 waveform(A image)

L2 waveform(B image)

R2 waveform (A image)

C waveform (B image) R2 waveform (B image)

R2C

L2

Properly set the angle of view so that the monitor center is located between the peaks (at the trough) of the output waveform center of the AF sensor.


39

5-6-4 Linearity Confirmation

Preparation)

(1) For Linearity Confirmation, use the product state.(2) Use the same adjustment conditions as those for “Linearity adjustment”.(3) As to the tools, use the same chart as that for “linearity adjustment”.

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity confirmation.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation LINEARITY CONFIRMATION CS Function MD ADDR DT

11-11-21-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03

2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) Actual distance is indicated in millimeters.

1-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 2900mm (-254mm, +216mm), respectively.22-12-22-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03


2-4

AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mmPlace the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens.Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 26.

Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 800mm (-18mm, +17mm), respectively.

MONITOR


Fig. 26

DAT:03

R1CL1R1C

L1Center of a monitor

C waveform (A image)






Actual distance of L1Actual distance of R1 Actual distance of C


40

5-7 Recorder Section Adjustment

Preparation)

(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment and External Synchronization Frequency Adjustment, perform the adjustment in the productstate.

(2) Adjustment conditionTape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : VTRASPECT RATIO : HD

5-7-1 SWP Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000)


Procedure)

(1) While playing back the color bar master, perform SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.

5-7-2 C. FG Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1380-000)


Procedure)

(1) While playing back the color bar master, perform C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.

5-7-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG

MODE Stop without VTR cassette

Procedure)

(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationC.FG (AUTO) CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0003 --2) Perform storing. WR Automatic adjustment is in progress. (press the PAUSE button.) RD Adjustment is completed.

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationSWP (AUTO) CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0001 --2) Perform storing. WR Automatic adjustment is in progress. (press the PAUSE button.) RD Automatic adjustment is completed.

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationREEL FG (AUTO) CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0007 --2) Perform storing. WR Automatic adjustment is in progress. (press the PAUSE button.) RD Adjustment is completed.


41

5-7-4 Flash Writing

SPEC. Data writing

Procedure)

(1) Write adjustment data (5-7-1 to 5-7-3) into Flash according the table shown below.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation EEPROM WRITING CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 002) Perform storing. RD -- Completion of Flash writing. (press the PAUSE button.)

MONITOR


42

5-8 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)

(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III section.

Preparation)

(1) For tape path adjustment, perform in the DMC III setting (P. 2, 3).

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table below (STEP 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1379-000) for tape path adjustment.At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%.

(2) After adjustment, release tracking shift setting according to the following table (STEP 4 : P.OFF).

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operationTRACKING TAPE CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Play back the tracking tape.2 1) Set up tracking shift .2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2

2) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.)3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ST F0~FF The amount of tracking shift is changed. adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF.4) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.)* Tracking shift released in DT00.

3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.4 1) Select the normal mode.

2) Turn off the power of the main unit.

MONITOR


43

5-9 Confirmation Items in Parts Replacement

5-9-1 HDV Joint RecordPurpose : Since the HDV uses a different connection controlling method from the DV, check is required at the connected section.

Preparation)

(1) Panasonic LP Tape(2) Adjustment Conditions

Camera mode (tape), HD mode

Procedure)

(1) Press the START/STOP key and perform Rec → Rec pause → Rec.(HDV self-recorded tape with connected section is created.)

(2) In the VCR/PLAY mode, perform the self-recorded playback of the connected section and check the connected section visually.

Criterion for judgement: During playback, the image and time code should be displayed smoothly without fixing at the connectedsection.

5-9-2 FF/REW SearchPurpose: Since the HDV uses a different search image generation system from the DV, checking is required.

Preparation)

(1) Panasonic LP Tape, Wireless Remote Controller(2) Adjustment Conditions

Camera mode (tape), HD mode

Procedure)

(1) Press the SEARCH SELECT key for the HDV self-recorded tape taken in para. 5-9-1 above, and then make search using the and keys.

(2) During Searching, visually check the searched image.

Criterion for judgement: During playback, the searched image should be free from distortion and freezing.

5-9-3 Checking the Playback Error ratePurpose: Since the electric acquisition of HD reproduction signals uses a partially different circuit from the SD, checking is required.

SPEC. 2 × 10 -5 or less

Preparation)

(1) Panasonic LP Tape

Procedure)

(2) During playback of an HDV self-recorded tape, make sure that the playback error rate is within the range of standard value in theservice mode.


44

5-9-4 HDV (MPEG-2 TS) Input / Output

Purpose : Since HDV uses a difference signal processing route from DV, checking is required.

Preparation)

(1) Main unit HV20 A for operation check (hereinafter referred to as A), DV cable (4-pin - 4-pin; commercial item)(2) Adjustment Conditions

Sending side : Camera mode (tape)Receiving side : VCR/PLAY mode

Procedure)

(1) As shown in Fig.27 below, the HDV input image from A should be able to be displayed on the LCD panel of the equipment B.(2) The HDV output image from the equipment B, which requires checking, should be able to be displayed on the LCD of connected

device A. (The combination is opposite to (1) above)

Criterion for judgement : When checking the step (1) and (2) described above, there should not be any problem.

Fig. 27

A B

DV Cable (4P-4P)

Flow of signal of (1)


45

5-9-5 Linearity Confirmation

Note)

Be sure to perform “5-9-5: Linearity confirmation” in the product state after replacing any part.

Preparation)

(1) For Linearity Confirmation, use the product state.(2) Use the same adjustment conditions as those for “Linearity adjustment”.(3) As to the tools, use the same chart as that for “linearity adjustment”.

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Linearity confirmation.

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation LINEARITY CONFIRMATION CS Function MD ADDR DT

11-11-21-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03


1-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 2900mm (-254mm, +216mm), respectively.22-12-22-3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 03


2-4 Make sure that L1, C and R1 are 800mm (-18mm, +17mm), respectively.

MONITOR


AF sensor linearity adjustment 800mmPlace the Chart D 800mm at a position 0.8m (-0.5cm, +0.5cm) apart from the front side of lens.Make fine adjustment of the position of the main body so that the waveform output from the AF sensor is as shown in figure 28.

Fig. 28

DAT:03

R1CL1R1C

L1Center of a monitor

C waveform (A image)






Actual distance of L1Actual distance of R1 Actual distance of C


46

5-9-6 Parallax Confirmation

Note)

Be sure to perform “5-9-6: Parallax comfirmation” in the product state after replacing any part.

Preparation)

(1) For Parallax Confirmation, use the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : Super-quick AFZOOM : Telephoto-endParallax comfirmation chart : 1.0m ± 0.02m from the front surface of the lens(For the parallax comfirmation chart, print and use the one on p. 51 of this manual. )CHART brightness : EV 11 or moreDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

<Parallax confirmation preparation>

CHART Parallax comfirmation chart (It is attached in this manual.)

SPEC. Should be within the criteria : X = ±11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, θ = ±96 [dec.]or less

Fig. 29

Parallax comfirmation chart

Telephoto-end 1.0m±0.02m

Square frame


47

Procedure)

(1) Properly set the angle of view so that the four corners of the square frame on the chart appear equally at the four corners of themonitor.

(2) Following the table below, make a check of parallax.(3) Read the values for X, Y, θ, C and calculate the parallax amount. (hexadecimal system → decimal system conversion)(4) Make sure that the criteria are met : X = ±11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, θ = below 96 [dec.]or less

Fig. 30

X

θ C Y

Hexadecimal system Decimal system conversion (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)

Calculation of parallax amount (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)

<How to read>

ex) X:14[hex.]

Y:FF1F[hex.]

θ:0017[hex.]

C:015B[hex.]

HEX2DEC(14)=20[dec.] (20−18.5)×0.94=1.4[%](X Parallax amount)X

HEX2DEC(FF1F)=65311[dec.] (65311−65536)×9.34/347=−6.1[%](Y Parallax amount)Y C

HEX2DEC(0017)=23[dec.] 23[dec.](θ Parallax amount)θ

HEX2DEC(015B)=347[dec.]

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationCS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 002) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD The output waveform of the AF sensor is indicated.

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3156 002) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) The parallax amount is indicated.

Set the parallax check chart at the position 1.0m (±0.02m) from the front surface of the lens.


48

5-10 Checkup when pointed out by the user

5-10-1 Parallax Confirmation

Note)

Be sure to perform “5-10-1: Parallax comfirmation” in the product state after replacing any part.

Preparation)

(1) For Parallax Confirmation, use the product state.(2) Adjustment Conditions.

Tape/Card : TapeCamera/VTR : CameraRecord mode : HDVAE : P modeAF : Super-quick AFZOOM : Telephoto-endParallax comfirmation chart : 1.0m ± 0.02m from the front surface of the lens(For the parallax comfirmation chart, print and use the one on p. 51 of this manual. )CHART brightness : EV 11 or moreDigital Zoom : OFFVibration absorption : OFFWB : Auto

<Parallax confirmation preparation>

CHART Parallax comfirmation chart (It is attached in this manual.)

SPEC. Should be within the criteria : X = ±11[%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, θ = ±96 [dec.]or less

Fig. 31

Telephoto-end 1.0m±0.02m

Square frame

Parallax comfirmation chart


49

Procedure)

(1) Properly set the angle of view so that the four corners of the square frame on the chart appear equally at the four corners of themonitor.

(2) Following the table below, make a check of parallax.(3) Read the values for X, Y, θ, C and calculate the parallax amount. (hexadecimal system → decimal system conversion)(4) Make sure that the criteria are met : X = ±11 [%]or less, Y = -14 to +10 [%]or less, θ = below 96 [dec.]or less

Note)

As to the parallax amount whose values are outside the criteria, replace its parts, check the parallax again, and make sure that thevalues are within the criteria.

Fig. 32

X

θ C Y

Hexadecimal system Decimal system conversion (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)

Calculation of parallax amount (The double underlined part shows the calculation expression.)

<How to read>

ex) X:14[hex.]

Y:FF1F[hex.]

θ:0017[hex.]

C:015B[hex.]

HEX2DEC(14)=20[dec.] (20−18.5)×0.94=1.4[%](X Parallax amount)X

HEX2DEC(FF1F)=65311[dec.] (65311−65536)×9.34/347=−6.1[%](Y Parallax amount)Y C

HEX2DEC(0017)=23[dec.] 23[dec.](θ Parallax amount)θ

HEX2DEC(015B)=347[dec.]

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationCS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3150 002) Perform storing. WR (press the PAUSE button.) RD The output waveform of the AF sensor is indicated.

2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3156 002) Perform storing. RD (press the PAUSE button.) The parallax amount is indicated.

Set the parallax check chart at the position 1.0m (±0.02m) from the front surface of the lens.


50

After printing, confirm that diameter of the circle is 36mm.

IS adjustment chart

Parallax confirmation chart

SERVICE HINTS

CONTENTS

1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

2. Trouble Shooting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52-1 Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52-2 Camera Picture Faulty ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62-3 Faulty of Playback Picture -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72-4 Warning Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

3. Memory Card Operation List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 123-1 Confirm Method ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 123-2 Result Confirmation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

1

1. Service Hints

1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

Each PCB is arranged as shown below.

Fig. 1

MAIN PCB

LCD PCB

JACK PCB

CARD PCB

CVF PCB

REAR PCB

CMOS SENSOR ASS’Y

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

2

1-2 Location of Main Elements

Fig. 2

MAIN PCB

FU1800

FU1900

FU3201

FU3200

FU500

FU3202

FU3203

IC103

IC3200MAIN POWER IC

IC1200LENS DRIVER

IC1613OPE AMP

IC1612D/A CONVERTER

IC2802COMPONENT DRIVER

IC105NAND GATE

IC108CHIP SELECT DECODER

IC2309AND GATE

IC2307SDRAM

IC33105.0V

REGULATOR

IC2000VRP2

IC2801BASEBAND IC

IC2800HDV CODEC IC

IC32603.2V

REGULATOR

IC32614.6V

REGULATOR

IC1611SHIFT LENSDRIVER IC

IC100CCM MI−COM

IC2830HDMI IC

IC2833PRESET AND CLEAR

IC2831DUAL INVERTER IC

IC1102SDRAM

IC1100DIGIC DV II

IC101FLASH

IC103AND GATE

IC106EX-OR GATE

IC801AIF4

IC1000MPX4

IC1501CVF DRIVER

IC3300SUB POWER ICIC102

EX-OR GATE


IC107NOR GATE

IC109ANALOG SWITCH

IC2301VIC HDV


IC23031394IC

IC2306OR GATE

IC2310FLASH/SRAM

IC2308AND GATE

IC1103SDRAM

IC3500USB IC

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

3

Fig. 3

CVF PCBLCD PCB

SENSOR PCB

JACK PCB

IC1691P SENSOR GYRO

IC1692Y SENSOR GYRO

IC1046CMOS

IC1041AFE

IC1045AMP

IC10444.2V

REGULATOR

IC10435V

REGULATOR

IC1040INVERTER

IC1042AFE

IC10472.7V REGULATOR

IC901LCD DRIVER

IC9032.8V

REGULATORIC902

EEPROM

IC501DC/DC CONVERTER

CONTROL

IC502CMOS IC

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

4

1-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.

Measurement condition : Product state, camera auto mode (AF OFF), LCD ON (The current consumption amounts are 0.02A less in each case when CVF is used.)

Preset voltage : 7.4V

POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)

CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.5

REC 0.59

VCR STOP 0.35

PLAY 0.47

POWER OFF 0.25(mA)

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

5

2. Trouble ShootingTo detect faulty parts for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.

2-1 Power Supply

<Hints>

When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.

Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN PCB → SUB MI-COM starts up. → CCM MI-COM starts up. → CCMMI-COM and PWM driver communicate and set the voltage. → VCR ON is set to “H”. → PWM driver starts up and turns on eachpower supply. → Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM → FR MI-COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. → Afterinitialized, the CCM MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the VCR ON changed to VCR Low.After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures.The power source mode switch is detected with the CCM MI-COM. → CCM MI-COM and PWM driver communicate and set thevoltage. → VCR ON is set to “H”. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Establishes communication with the FRMI-COM → System startup.

<Check Points>

1) Key InputsCheck the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.

2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communicationIf the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.

3) Error in Mechanism (“SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT” P. 10)If any errors occur due to mechanical trouble during initialization, those errors will be detected.In this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters an “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data inSERVICE mode.

4) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY PCB.Check the continuity of the fuses FU500, 1800, 1900, 3200, 3201, 3202, 3203, and on the MAIN PCB. If no good, replace the fusesand check the power consumption.

5) Replace the MAIN PCB with a service part and check the operation.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

6

2-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>

The flow of HD camera output is as below.CMOS PCB → MAIN PCB (DIGIC DV2 → BASEBAND IC → 75 Ω DRIVER) → COMPONENT TERMINAL, DV TERMINALThe flow of SD camera output is as below.CMOS PCB → MAIN PCB (DIGIC DV2 → BASEBAND IC → VIC HDV) → DV TERMINAL, AV TERMINALFor either of them, the image taken by CMOS is processed in DIGIC DV2 and output to the subsequent processing IC.

<Check Points>

1) Lens checkIf no camera picture appears, check in service mode if the lens has been reset. If NG, check the lens.

2) Confirming blue back outputThe blue back of the HD signal is created in BASEBAND IC; while that of the SD signal is created in the VIC HDV. If it isconfirmed, the signal lines after the BASEBAND IC/VIC HDV are regarded as OK.

3) Confirming card image playbackFor the card rplayback image, the DIGIC DV2 reads out data from the memory card, performs image processing and outputs theresulting image to the subsequent circuit.If the output is confirmed, the signal lines after the DIGIC DV2 are regarded as OK.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

7

2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>

The track pitch, track length and tape speed are the same for HDV recording and DV recording, however, the method for recording dataon a tape for DV recording differs from that of HDV recording. Thus the phenomenon caused by an error that exceeds the capability ofthe error correction circuit is also different.For SD recording, it normally appears as block noise; while for HDV recording, it appears as a stopped image or blue back display onthe screen.Either phenomenon is caused by the occurrence of an error that exceeds the error correction circuit. For HDV recording, since MPEG-2is employed for image compression and compression between the frames is performed, restoration for each frame is not possible. Thusin the event of an error, a failure occurs for a period of 1GOP = 15 frames = 0.5 seconds.For the reasons shown above, it is recommended to use a tape applicable to HDV recording that prevents errors in HDV recording.Both for HDV recording / SD recording, be sure to judge the reproduced image by its error rate.

<Check Points>

1) Deterioration of Tape QualityCheck if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on the magnetic face of the tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of another unit.

2) Error Rate (“SERVICE MODE / ADJUSTMENT” P. 8, 9)In the service mode, check the error rate of playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10-5.If it is no good, proceed as follows.

(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.(2) Run a cleaning tape.

Use a cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).

[Playback time]

After replacement of the drum unit → 25 secondsFor cleaning → 25 seconds per time

* Do not play back for 25 seconds or more continuously.* Limit the total playback time to five minutes.* When using hard-type cleaning tape, it is not necessary to select the cleaning mode on the main unit.

(3) Check the error rate again.If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened withalcohol.* Take care not to damage the head.* Do not touch the head with bare hands.

(4) Check the error rate again.If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use atape which has been purchased at a different time. (For both HDV and SD, use a Panasonic tape applicable to LP, as usual.)The error rate may become worse due to inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.

(5) Check the error rate again.If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.

(6) Check the error rate again.If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

8

2-4 Warning Displays

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED• When unable to record to tape due to copy protection information.• When trying to record a tape containing copyright protection information or to record an external input image to a card.

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED• When unable to play tape due to copyright protection information.

SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME• When the power has been turned on without setting the time zone and/or date and time.

REMOVE THE CASSETTE• When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.

HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE• When the heads are clogged.

CHECK THE HDV/DV INPUT• When HDV or DV is not connected or the device is connected but cannot be recognized.

CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK• When the battery charge level has dropped.

THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION• When “REC” was pressed in VCR mode when recording is enabled but the cassette was set to write-protection. In Camera

mode, when the power is turned ON, when the Start/Stop button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.

TAPE END• When the tape end is detected or when a key (such as FF or PLAY) for forwarding the tape in the forward direction is pressed in

a mode that allows transition to the forward direction while the tape end being detected.

CARD ERROR• When an error occurred in the card and recording cannot be performed.

CARD FULL• When the available space on the card is low.

NAMING ERROR• When the file number and directory number have reached the maximum.

UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE• When you tried to play an unplayable image type, incompatible JPEG-compressed image, or image with corrupted data.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

9

PRINT ORDER ERROR• When there are too many print marks (998 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.

NO CARD• When the card is not inserted in the socket of the main unit.

NO IMAGES• When the image that should be played in the card cannot be found.

IN CARD POSITION• When pressing the Start/Stop button in Card camera mode.

PAPER ERROR• When a paper error occurs.

NO PAPER• When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer.

PAPER JAM• When a paper jam occurs during printing.

NO INK• When the ink is not installed properly or the ink has run out.

LOW INK LEVEL• When the ink level is low.

INK ABSORBER FULL• When the ink absorber is full.

CANNOT PRINT!• When attempting to print a different type of still image or one recorded by another device, or a still image imported to and edited

on a computer.

SET PRINT ORDER

• When attempting to print still images not designated for printing by using the “⇒Print” command in the Card Playback

menu.

READJUST TRIMMING• When attempting to change the “Paper setting” setting after making the trimming settings.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

10

PRINTER ERROR• When a problem occurs in the printer.

COMMUNICATION ERROR• When an error has occurred during communication.

PRINTER IN USE• When the printer is in use. Check the printer status.

PAPER LEVER ERROR• When the printer paper lever is in the improper position.

PRINTER COVER OPEN• When the printer cover is open.

NO PRINT HEAD• When the ink head has not been installed in the printer.

FIRMWARE UPDATED

CHECK PRINT SETTINGS• When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the Easy Direct button was pressed even though this

value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.

• When an attempt has been made to establish a setting which exceeds the number of images (998) which can be set for

DPOF transfer.

TOO MANY IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE• Disconnect the USB cable, delete the still images from the memory card until there are 1800 or less, and then reconnect the USB

cable.

CANNOT TRANSFER!• When “PC Background” is set, and then video is displayed (“Setting” icon and icon to its right are grayed out, and the PRINT/

SHARE button lights up), and the PRINT/SHARE button is pressed.

AUTO POWER OFF• When automatically setting the power off.

CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTEDREMOVE THE CASSETTE

• When condensation has formed.

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

11

INCORRECT TAPE SPECIFICATION

CHECK THE CASSETTE[INCORRECT TAPE SPECIFICATION]

INPUT SIGNAL NOT SUPPORTEDPLAYBACK STD LOCKED

PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTEDPLAYBACK STD LOCKED INCOMPATIBLE VIDEO INPUT

HV20 ESERVICE HINTS

12

3. Memory Card Operation List

3-1 Confirm Method

(1) Pulling out and insertion of memory card• Remove and reinsert the memory card three times, and then confirm that it can be mounted normally.

(2) Memory card initialization• Initialize the memory card with the camera.

(3) Still image shooting• Take three or more shots at each image size (LW, L, M, S) and quality (S.Fine, Fine, Normal).• Shot consecutive shots with flash at S and S.Fine until the buffer is full.• Take shots at an arbitrary size and quality until the "Card is Full" message appears (do S, Normal last).

(4) Still image playback• Play back several of the images taken, on both individual and index screens, to confirm.

(5) Card removal• Remove the card and check the images on a PC. Reinsert the card and confirm that it can be mounted normally.

(6) Still image playback• Confirm that the last image played back is played back correctly.

(7) Deletion• Run "ERASE ALL IMAGES" and confirm that all still images can be deleted.

3-2 Result Confirmation

No. Manufacturer Capacity Manufacturing years Result confirmation

1 Panasonic 16MB 2005/05






7 Panasonic 1GB 2006/02

8 Panasonic 2GB 2006/08

9 TOSHIBA 32MB 2003/06

10 TOSHIBA 64MB 2003/07

11 TOSHIBA 128MB 2005/01

12 TOSHIBA 256MB 2005/01

13 TOSHIBA 1GB 2006/01

14 TOSHIBA 2GB 2006/07

15 SanDisk 32MB 2003/06

16 SanDisk 64MB 2003/08

17 SanDisk 128MB 2004/08

18 SanDisk 256MB 2004/06

19 SanDisk 512MB 2005/05

20 SanDisk 1GB 2006/01

21 SanDisk 2GB 2006/04

22 Lexar 64MB 2005/02

23 Lexar 128MB 2005/06

24 Lexar 256MB 2006/03

25 Lexar 512MB 2006/03

26 Lexar 1GB 2006/06

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

CONTENTS

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

BLOCK DIAGRAMSCAMERA SECTION-1CAMERA SECTION-2CAMERA SECTION-3SYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONSERVO SECTIONRECORDER SECTION-1RECORDER SECTION-2RECORDER SECTION-3POWER SUPPLY SECTIONCVF SECTIONLCD PCB,FOCUS DIAL,LCD FPC ASS’Y SECTIONJACK PCB,FRONT COVER ASS’Y SECTIONCARD,REAR PCB,HDMI FPC ASS’Y SECTION

LENS AF ASS'Y

ZOOM MOTOR

FOCUS MOTOR

FOCUS SENS

ZOOM SENS

HALL SENS

HALL SENS

IG METER

Metal contact (Pins' face up)Metal contact (Pins' face down)

: :

BACK LIGHT

LCD

LCD UNIT

Metal contact Metal contact

24P

24P 6P

6P

27P

20P

2P

2P

20P

2P

45P

45P

20P

20P

2P

27P

20P

20P

25P

5P

45P

45P50P

50P

31P

31P

12P

12P

4P

45P

17P

17P

31P

31P

45P

2P

2P

2P

2P

12P

12P

10P

10P 7P 11P 18P 21P

7P 11P 18P 5P

5P

21P

4P

5P

25P

mini SD CARD

LCD PCB

LCD KEY ASS'Y

FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y

JACK PCBMAIN PCB

AUTO FOCUS ASS'Y

FRONT COVER ASS'Y

CASSETTE COVER ASS'Y

CMOS SENSOR ASS'Y

TOP COVER ASS'Y

CVF FPC ASS'Y

LCD FPC ASS'Y

FLASH ASS'Y

SPEAKER ASS'YHDMI FPC ASS'Y

CARD PCB

BATTERY TERMINAL

REAR PCB

CVF PCB

CVF LCD

( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS III )DMC III

MAINCHASSIS

DRUMMOTOR

LOADINGMOTOR

SLIDECHASSIS

VIDEOHEAD

USB JACK

AV JACK

COMPONENTJACK

DCJACK

HDV/DVJACK

MIC JACK

CN20007 1

CN30211 1

CN30318 1

CN28001

45

2

44

CN902

CN50

CN901

IC902IC903 IC901

1

1 2

27 26

24

1 6

IC1042

IC1041

IC1047

IC1045

IC1044

IC1040IC1043

IC1046

CN10

40

A1

A25

B1

B25

CN2400IC1501

IC2307

IC2303

IC2301

IC2310

IC300

IC2800

IC2000

IC2801

IC2802

IC801

IC3310

CN101

CN301

CN3200

IC110

15

64

12

110

CN701

CN1700

CN1200

CN102 CN100 CN2900

CN1000

CN900CN1600 CN1501

CN2830

CN300

CN3201

IC1612

IC3500

IC1102

IC1103

IC1100

IC101

IC104

IC1613

IC2309

IC2308

IC1611

IC100IC2830

IC2831

IC2833

IC3300

IC3260

IC3261 IC3200

CN100

CN2

CN3

CN1

CN102

IC1000

IC1200

IC1104

IC102

IC105 IC107 IC106

IC103

IC108

IC109

IC23061

1

1 1

1

1

2

21

20

20

25

12

4544

12

3130

112

4

17

3130

12

4544 B1 B12

A1 A12B1

B1

B10

B25

A1

A1

A10

A25

12

4544

CN501

IC502IC501

1

1 2

3 4

1

1

12

1112

2

1

2

1014 12

13 11

6

3 4 5

2

CN701

CN1

CN100

CN100

CN503

CN502

CN10

CN20

CN4101

CN10CN15

IC1692IC1691

2425

21

CN4102201

51

CN102

CN101CN103

987

51

1

2

6

CN104

CN100

1 45

1

20

2 44

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM HV20 E

CANON INC. 2007C01 Mar. 2007

CN100A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9

A10A11A12B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12

CN10112CN102

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

CN300123456789

101112131415161718192021

CN301123456789

10CN302

123456789

1011

CN303123456789

101112131415161718

PCST0PCST2PCST4TPC0TRSTTDOTCKDINTE3VXDEBENDEBUDGNDGNDPCST1PCST3DCLKGNDTDITMSCCM RESETEJEGNDDEBDDDEBCLK

GNDEJECT SW

GNDLI RESETD+N.C.D−GNDVBUSZOOM ADGNDP.AE/GREEN SWVTR UNREGKEY AD1ACCESS&CHARGE LEDSTART/STOP SWT/C POW SWDVDD2.7VVTR POW SWCAM POW LEDCAM POW SWKEY AD0PHOTO SWGNDH PHOTO SWLI POW2AVDD2.7VSP+GNDSP−GNDCARD DETCARD DAT1GNDCARD DAT0GNDGNDCARD CLKGNDDVDD2.7VCARD CMDGNDGNDCARD DAT3CARD DAT2GNDGND

BOT EBOT CMIC GNDMIC3REC PrfMIC2MIC1Tin−Tout−Tin+Tout+C INCIN GNDLED ALED KSin−Sout−Sin+Sout+EOT EEOT C

LOAD(+)LOAD(+)MSW VssMSW VccMSW SensLOAD(−)LOAD(−)DEW+DEW−N.C

UUVVDFGDPGSens COMSens GardCoil COMWW

CFG1CFG VccCFG GNDCFG2v−v+u−u+C H+w+w−C H−VcoilVcoilWcoilWcoilUcoilUcoil

MAIN PCB

CN7011234CN900

123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031


A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23A24A25B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25

CN1200123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

INT MIC GND LINT MIC LINT MIC GND RINT MIC R

NMF CCW SWKEY AD3NMF CW SWGND(KEY GND)PANEL BT SWLCD BL POWLCD BL POW(N.C)LCD BL VFB(N.C)LCD ONLCD EEP SIN VLCD/EEP SCLKLCD/EEP SOLCD/EEP CS VLCD CSLCD8.5VLCD3.0VLCD5VLCD3.0VC SYNCGNDGNDPANEL BPANEL RPANEL GGNDKEY AD3KEY AD4GND(KEY GND)PANEL OPEN SW

GNDGR L−GR L+GR U−GR U+GR CLK+GR CLK−GNDB CLK−B CLK+B L+B L−B U+B U−GNDAFE TXDAFE SCKCCD TEMPAFEG XCSXRESETCSSDATASCKGNDSENS −1.0VGNDGB CLK−GB CLK+GB L+GB L−GB U+GB U−GNDR L−R L+R U−R U+R CLK+R CLK−GNDCAM ONAFE HDAFE VDAFEB XCSAFER XCSGNDAFE1.8VAFE1.8VAVDD3VCAM5.1V

FOCUS VCCFOCUS anaAFOCUS anaBFOCUS TARGFOCUS GNDZOOM B−ZOOM A−ZOOM B+ZOOM A+ND DRIVE+ND DRIVE−ND HALL IN+ND HALL OUT+ND HALL IN−ND HALL OUT−GND No ConnectFOCUS DRIVE+FOCUS DRIVE−GND No ConnectZOOM SENSZOOM VCCZOOM LEDL TEMPL TEMP 2.7VIG DRIVE−IG DRIVE+IG HALL IN+IG HALL OUT+IG HALL IN−IG HALL OUT−IG HALL OUT−

MAIN PCB

CN1501123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

CN1600123456789

101112

CN1700123456789

1011121314151617

CN20001234567CN2400

123456CN2800

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

SHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE ID1ST VDHGL[1]ST TMG 1SHOE ID2ADV MIC GNDADV MIC LADV/EXT MIC RGND(KEY GND)KEY AD2DIRECTPRINT LEDP5VAVDD2.7VP GY OUTGND(GY GND)Y GY OUTGND(EVF VSS)EVF COM ACEVF PSIGEVF GEVF REVF BEVF PCGEVF ENBEVF VCKEVF VSTEVF XSTBEVF REFEVF NRWEVF HCK1EVF HCK2EVF HSTEVF VSSGEVF 8.5V(EVF VDD)GND(EVF VSS)P5VEVF BL2.7VEVF BL2.7V

T HALL IN −T HALL OUT +T HALL OUT −T HALL IN +Y DRIVE AY DRIVE BP DRIVE BP DRIVE AP HALL IN +P HALL OUT −P HALL OUT +P HALL IN −

MISO/TINTEVVCAFADSGNDVGRVAREFVCCMOSISCLKSGND(N.C.)READVCCAFCLKCLKOCSAFDGND

HA GNDH2BH2AHA GNDH1BH1AHA GND

XTPBTPBXTPATPAE1E2

GNDBARRMO OUT2[A−]BARRMO OUT1[A]BARRMO OUT4[B−]BARRMO OUT3[B]BARRSW CLOSEBARRSW LEDBARRSW OPENWHITE LEDRMC INSTROBE3VP5VST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGST TMG ONST TMGST EFCHGST VDHGLST GNDST GNDST GNDST GNDGNDYY GNDPBPB/PC GNDPRGNDD ID1D ID3D DETAV GNDV I/O/HP RAV JACK DETAV GNDAV L/HP LAV RMIC GNDEXT LADV/EXT MIC REXT P DET

MAIN PCB

CN2830123456789

1011121314151617181920


A10B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10CN3201

12345

DDC/CEC GROUNDHPD+5V+5VSDASCLClock ShieldClock−Clock+D0 ShieldD0−D0+D1 ShieldD1−D1+D2 ShieldD2−D2+GNDGND

EVF COM DCN.C.EVF COM ACVTR UNREGMIC2MIC3GNDEVF BEVF GEVF RV I/O/HP RGNDVTR POW SWEVF HDCAM POW SWFCH 0N.C.SWPGNDPBRF

BATT−BATT−BATT− TEMPBATT+BATT+

MAIN PCB

CN50123456CN901

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627

CN902123456789

101112131415161718192021222324

KEY GNDSTOPPLAYFFREWKEY GND

KEY GNDKEY AD4KEY AD3GNDPANEL G(N.C)PANEL R(N.C)PANEL BGNDGNDC SYNCLCD3.0VLCD5VLCD3.0VLCD8.5VLCD CSLCD EEP CS VLCD/EEP SOLCD/EEP SCLKLCD EEP SIN VLCD ON(N.C)LCD BL VFB(N.C)LCD BL POWLCD BL POW

COM2RGTBLUEREDGREENPSIGHCK1HCK2NRWTESTREFHSTPCGXSTBYVSSGN.C.GND(VSS)VDDDWNENVCKVSTCSLCD COM AC(COM1)

LCD PCB


A10A111A2A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23A24A25B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25

GNDGR L−GR L+GR U−GR U+GR CLK+GR CLK−GNDB CLK−B CLK+B L+B L−B U+B U−GNDAFE TXDAFE SCKCCD TEMPAFEG XCSXRESETCSSDATASCKGNDSENS −1.0VGNDGB CLK−GB CLK+GB L+GB L−GB U+GB U−GNDR L−R L+R U−R U+R CLK+R CLK−GNDCAM ONAFE HDAFE VDAFEB XCSAFER XCSGNDAFE1.8VAFE1.8VAVDD3VCAM5.1V

CMOS SENSOR ASS'Y

CN4101123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425

CN4102123456789

1011121314151617181920

AVDD2.7V P GY OUTGY GNDY GY OUTEVF VSSEVF COM ACEVF PSIGEVF GEVF REVF BEVF PCGEVF ENBEVF VCKEVF VSTEVF XSTBEVF REFEVF NRWEVF HCK1EVF HCK2EVF HSTEVF VSSGEVF VDDEVF VSSEVF VSSEVF VSS

VDDVSSVSSGHSTHCK2HCK1RGTNRWDWNREFXSTBVSTVCKENBPCGBLUEREDGREENPSIGCOM

CVF PCB

CN10123456CN20

123456789

1011121314

CN100123456789

101112

CN501123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

CN50212CN503

12

AUDIO RGND DETGNDVIDEOAUDIO LPLUG IN

YY GNDPBPB/PC GNDPRDET1DET3DET2D DETD DET GNDE1E2E3E4

P5VWHITE LEDRMC INGNDBARRSW CLOSEBAR LED CLBARRSW OPENBAR LED OPBARRMO OUT4[B−]BARRMO OUT1[A]BARRMO OUT3[B]BARRMO OUT2[A−]

EXT P DETADV/EXT MIC REXT LMIC GNDAV RAV L/HP LAV GNDAV JACK DETV I/O/HP RAV GNDD DETD ID3D ID1D GNDPR D PR 7PB/PC GND D GNDPB D PB 7Y GND D GNDY D Y 5GND D GNDST GNDST GNDST GNDST GNDST VDHGLST EFCHGST TMGST TMG ONST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGP5VSTROBE3VRMC INWHITE LEDBARRSW OPENBARRSW LEDBARRSW CLOSEBARRMO OUT3[B]BARRMO OUT4[B−]BARRMO OUT1[A]BARRMO OUT2[A−]GND

Xe(−)Xe(+)

T[−]T[+]

JACK PCB

CN100123456789

1011121314151617181920

CN101123456789

1011121314151617

CN102123456789CN103

12CN104

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

TAPE/CARD SWGNDVTR POW SWCAM POW SWPHOTO SWH PHOTO SWAVDD2.7VZOOM ADGNDP.AE/GREEN SWKEY AD1 FUNCSTART/STOP SWDVDD2.7VCAM POW LEDKEY AD0 LKEY AD0 CKEY AD1 DKEY AD0 RGNDKEY AD1 U

CD/DAT3CMDVSS1VDDCLKVSS2DAT0DAT1DAT2NC1NC2CARD DETCOMG3G4G1G2

VBUSD+D−NCGNDGNDGNDGNDGND

SP−SP+

GNDCARD DAT2CARD DAT3GNDGNDCARD CMDDVDD2.7VGNDCARD CLKGNDGNDCARD DAT0GNDCARD DAT1CARD DETGNDSP−GNDSP+AVDD2.7VLI POW2H PHOTO SWGND USBPHOTO SWKEY AD0CAM POW SWCAM POW LEDVTR POW SWDVDD2.7VT/C POW SWSTART/STOP SWACCESS&CHARGE LEDKEY AD1VTR UNREGP.AE/GREEN SWGNDZOOM ADVBUSGND USBD−N.C.D+LI RESETGND USBGND USB

CARD PCB

CN1123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

CN2123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627

CN312345

MF CCW SWKEY AD3MF CW SWKEY GNDPANEL BT SWLCD BL POWLCD BL POW(N.C)LCD BL VFB(N.C)LCD ONLCD EEP SIN VLCD/EEP SCLKLCD/EEP SOLCD/EEP CS VLCD CSLCD8.5VLCD3.0VLCD5VLCD3.0VC SYNCGNDGNDPANEL BPANEL RPANEL GGNDKEY AD3KEY AD4KEY GNDPANEL OPEN SW

KEY GNDKEY AD4KEY AD3GNDPANEL G(N.C)PANEL R(N.C)PANEL BGNDGNDC SYNCLCD3.0VLCD5VLCD3.0VLCD8.5VLCD CSLCD EEP CS VLCD/EEP SOLCD/EEP SCLKLCD EEP SIN VLCD ON(N.C)LCD BL VFB(N.C)LCD BL POWLCD BL POW

KEY GNDKEY GNDMF CW SWKEY AD3MF CCW SW

LCD FPC ASS'Y

CN100123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445

CN102123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425

SHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE GNDSHOE ID1ST VDHGL[1]ST TMG 1SHOE ID2ADV MIC GNDADV MIC LADV/EXT MIC RGNDKEY AD2DIRECTPRINT LEDP5VAVDD2.7VP GY OUTGND(GY GND)Y GY OUTGND(EVF VSS)EVF COM ACEVF PSIGEVF GEVF REVF BEVF PCGEVF ENBEVF VCKEVF VSTEVF XSTBEVF REFEVF NRWEVF HCK1EVF HCK2EVF HSTEVF VSSGEVF 8.5VGND(EVF VSS)P5VEVF BL2.7VEVF BL2.7V

AVDD2.7V P GY OUTGND(GY GND)Y GY OUTGND(VSS)EVF COM AC(COM)PSIGEVF GEVF REVF BPCGENBVCKVSTXSTBREFNRWHCK1HCK2HSTVSSGEVF8.5(VDD)GND(VSS)GND(VSS)GND(VSS)

CVF FPC ASS'Y

CN10123456789

1011121314151617181920

CN15123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

DDC/CEC GROUNDHPD+5V+5VSDASCLClock ShieldClock−Clock+D0 ShieldD0−D0+D1 ShieldD1−D1+D2 ShieldD2−D2+GNDGND

TMDS DATA2+TMDS DATA2 SHIELDTMDS DATA2−TMDS DATA1+TMDS DATA1 SHIELDTMDS DATA1−TMDS DATA0+TMDS DATA0 SHIELDTMDS DATA0−TMDS CLOCK+TMDS CLOCK SHIELDTMDS CLOCK−CECNCSCLSDADDC/CEC GROUND+5V POWERHOT PLUG DETECTSHELL1SHELL2SHELL3SHELL4

HDMI FPC ASS'Y

CN100123456789

101112

P5VWHITE LEDRMC INGNDBARRSW CLOSEBAR LED CLBARRSW OPENBAR LED OPBARRMO OUT4BARRMO OUT1BARRMO OUT3BARRMO OUT2

FRONT FPC ASS'Y

CN112345

KEY GNDKEY GNDMF CW SWKEY AD3MF CCW SW

FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM HV20 E

DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNALANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL

TOSYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONMAIN PCB


TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN PCB

IC1042AD9973BBCZ

AFE

IC1041AD9973BBCZ

AFE

IC1040TC7SZU04FU

INVERTER

5VIN4 VOUTIC1047

NJM2877F3-282.7V REGULATOR

5VIN4 VOUT

IC1044NJM2877F3-42

4.2V REGULATOR

5VIN

1

CONT

1

CONT

1

CONT

4 VOUTIC1043


IC1045NJM12904R

AMP

H13ADR(1)

H14ADR(2)

G10ADR(3)

G11ADR(4)

G14ADR(5)

F11ADR(6)

F12ADR(7)

F13ADR(8)

F14ADR(9)

E10ADR(10)

E11ADR(11)

E12ADR(12)

E13ADR(13)

D13ADR(14)

D14ADR(15)

C12DATA(0)

B12DATA(1)

B13DATA(2)

A13DATA(3)

A12DATA(4)

C11DATA(5)

B11DATA(6)

A11DATA(7)

D10DATA(8)

B10DATA(9)

A10DATA(10)

E9DATA(11)

H4DO00−

H5DO00+

J2DO01−

J3DO01+

H3CLKO0−

H2CLKO0+

F2DO10−

F1DO10+

F5DO11−

F4DO11+

G2CLKO1−

G3CLKO1+

H12ADR(0)

D9DATA(12)

C9DATA(13)

B9DATA(14)

A9DATA(15)

C8 XRDY

D8 RD

B8 CS

K4 VDI

K3 HDI

L1 VDO

L2 HDO

IC1000MB87M8201BGL-GE1

MPX4

MPX RDY

A7 XRESETMPX XRST

XERD M

D7 WEXEWRL M

MPX XCS

IC1046LD1020CMOS

AFE2.7V

VTXH 4.2V

SENS VDD5V

20 VD

17 XRESET

10 SDI

11 SCLK

12 CS

23 VRESL

8 VDD1

21 VDD2

13 VCHR/VC0R

AFE VD19 HD

AFE HD

TG XRST

TG TXD

TG SCK

TG XCS

DOUT0N B H1

DOUT0P B G1

DOUT1N B D1

DOUT1P B C1

TCLKP B E1

TCLKN B F1

DOUT0N A J2

DOUT0P A J1

DOUT1N A E2

DOUT1P A D2

TCLKP A F2

TCLKN A G2

HD A C3

CLI B H10

CLI A H9

VD A B5

SCK A C6

SDATA A C7

SL B A9

AFE HD

AFE VDHD B C4

AFE HD

AFE SCK

SCK B A7AFE SCK

VD B C5AFE VD

AFE TXD

SDATA B A8AFE TXD

AFEG XCSSL A B7

AFEG XCS

CCDINP AE9OUT3S 5

CCDINP BE10

CCDINP AE9

CCDINP BE10

OUT2S 27

VTXH 22

OUT4S 24

OUT1S

OUT1N

OUT4N

CCDINM BD10

CCDINM AD9

3

25

OUT2N

OUT3N

CCDINM BD10

CCDINM AD9

26

4

MCLK

2

H18K2

RG BK918

CN1040B9

B10B11B12B13B14A9

A10A11A12A13A14A2A3A4A5A6A7B2B3B4B5B6B7

B17B18A17A16B19B20A19A20A21A22A23B22B23B24B16B25A25A18

R L−R L+R U−R U+

R CLK+R CLK−B CLK−B CLK+

B L+B L−B U+B U−

GR L−GR L+GR U−GR U+

GR CLK+GR CLK−GB CLK−GB CLK+

GB L+GB L−GB U+GB U−

AFE HDAFE VD

AFE SCKAFE TXD

AFEB XCSAFER XCSAFEG XCS

XRESETCS

SDATASCK

AFE1.8VAFE1.8VAVDD3VCAM ONCAM5.1V

SENS −1.0VCCD TEMP

CN1000B9

B10B11B12B13B14A9

A10A11A12A13A14A2A3A4A5A6A7B2B3B4B5B6B7

B17B18A17A16B19B20A19A20A21A22A23B16A18B22B23B24B25A25

R L−R L+R U−R U+

R CLK+R CLK−B CLK−B CLK+

B L+B L−B U+B U−

GR L−GR L+GR U−GR U+

GR CLK+GR CLK−GB CLK−GB CLK+

GB L+GB L−GB U+GB U−

AFE HDAFE VD

AFE SCKAFE TXD

AFEB XCSAFER XCSAFEG XCS

XRESETCS

SDATASCK

CAM ONCCD TEMP

AFE1.8VAFE1.8VAVDD3VCAM5.1V

SENS −1.0VVTXL −1.35V

TH1040

AFE1.8V

AFE1.8V

AVDD3VCAM5.35VSENS −1.35V

X1040

1 3

DI00−P4

DI00+N4

DI01−P5

CLKI0−

DI01+N5

P3

L13

L12

K12

K11

M13

M11

N11

M12

N12

CLKI0+

DI30−

DI30+

DI31−

CLKI3−

DI31+

CLKI3+

DI20−

DI20+

DI21−

CLKI2−

DI21+

CLKI2+

DI10−

DI10+

DI11−

CLKI1−

DI11+

CLKI1+

N3

N13

N10

M10

GR L−

GR CLK−

GR CLK+

GR U+

GR U−

GR L+

GB L−

GB CLK−

GB CLK+

GB U+

GB U−

GB L+

DOUT0N B H1

DOUT0P B G1

DOUT1N B D1

DOUT1P B C1

TCLKP B E1

TCLKN B F1

DOUT0N A J2

DOUT0P A J1

DOUT1N A E2

DOUT1P A D2

TCLKP A F2

TCLKN A G2

HD A C3

CLI B H10

CLI A H9

VD A B5

SCK A C6

SDATA A C7

SL B A9

AFE HD

AFE VDHD B C4

AFE HD

AFE SCK

SCK B A7AFE SCK

VD B C5AFE VD

AFE TXD

SDATA B A8AFE TXD

AFER XCSSL A B7

AFEB XCS

R L−

R CLK−

R CLK+

R U+

R U−

R L+

B L−

B CLK−

B CLK+

B U+

B U−

B L+

4 2

13

2

75

6

SENS VDD5VVTXH 4.2V

VTXL 7 VTXL −1.35V

EDATA M DATA0 to 15EADDR M ADD0 to 15

DOUT00 NDOUT00 PDOUT01 NDOUT01 PTCLK00 NTCLK00 PDOUT10 NDOUT10 PDOUT11 NDOUT11 PTCLK01 NTCLK01 P

TGVDTGHD

MPX RDYMPX XRSTXEWRL MXERD M

MPX XCSAFE TXDAFE SCK

AFER XCSAFEG XCSAFEB XCSTG XRSTTG XCSTG TXDTG SCKCAM ON

CCD TEMP

R L−

R CLK−

R CLK+

R U+

R U−

R L+

B L−

B CLK−

B CLK+

B U+

B U−

B L+

GR L−

GR CLK−

GR CLK+

GR U+

GR U−

GR L+

N8

P8

K9

K8

M7

N7

GB L−

GB CLK−

GB CLK+

GB U+

GB U−

GB L+

AFE2.7V

SENS VDD5V

CMOS SENSOR PCB MAIN PCB(1/10)

CAMERA SECTION-1

C CANON INC. 200701 Mar. 2007

HV20 E

DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNALDIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL

U24

U25

V23

V24

V25

W20

W23

W25

AA

20M

AD

DR

U(1

3)

MA

DD

R U

(14)

U23

U21

T21

MA

DD

R U

(0)

MA

DD

R U

(1)

MA

DD

R U

(2)

MA

DD

R U

(3)

MA

DD

R U

(4)

MA

DD

R U

(5)

MA

DD

R U

(6)

MA

DD

R U

(7)

MA

DD

R U

(8)

MA

DD

R U

(9)

MA

DD

R U

(11)

W24

MA

DD

R U

(10)

V21

MD

QM

U(0

)

V20

MD

QM

U(1

)

T24

MD

QM

U(2

)

T23

MD

QM

U(3

)

Y24

MC

KE

U

AB

25M

CLK

U

Y25

XM

CS

U

AA

25X

MR

AS

U

AB

24

XM

CA

S U

AB

23

XM

WE

U

L6V

DD

E F

2

G3

VD

DE

F1

AA

10V

DD

E C

3

AC

7V

DD

E C

4

AC

16V

DD

E C

2

Y13

VD

DE

C1

AD

1V

DD

E G

1

C2

VD

DE

E1

A3

VD

DE

A8

A7

VD

DE

A7

AA

21

AD10EDATA M(0)

AE10EDATA M(1)

AA9EDATA M(2)

AC9EDATA M(3)

AD9EDATA M(4)

AE9EDATA M(5)

AD8EDATA M(6)

AE8EDATA M(7)

AD7EDATA M(8)

AE7EDATA M(9)

AC6EDATA M(10)

AD6EDATA M(11)

AE6EDATA M(12)

AC5EDATA M(13)

AD5EDATA M(14)

AE5EDATA M(15)

IC1100MB8AA1150BGL-GE1

DIGIC DV I I

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

DQ8

DQ9

DQ10

DQ11

DQ12

DQ13

DQ14

DQ15

DQ16

DQ17

DQ18

DQ19

DQ20

DQ21

DQ22

DQ23

DQ24

DQ25

DQ26

DQ27

DQ28

DQ29

DQ30

DQ31

M23 MDATA L(0)

M21 MDATA L(1)

L25

L24

MDATA L(2)

L23

MDATA L(3)

L21

MDATA L(4)

K25

MDATA L(5)

K23

MDATA L(6)

J25

MDATA L(7)

J24

MDATA L(8)

J23

MDATA L(9)

J21

MDATA L(10)

J20

MDATA L(11)

M20

MDATA L(12)

G21

MDATA L(13)

G20

MDATA L(14)

F20

MDATA L(15)

E21

MDATA L(16)

E20

MDATA L(17)

A19

MDATA L(18)

B19

MDATA L(19)

C19

MDATA L(20)

F19

MDATA L(21)

C18

MDATA L(22)

E18

MDATA L(23)

F18

MDATA L(24)

A17

MDATA L(25)

B17

MDATA L(26)

C17

MDATA L(27)

E17

MDATA L(28)

F17

MDATA L(29)

MDATA L(30)

A18

MDATA L(31)

R8DQ0

N7DQ1

R9DQ2

N8DQ3

P9DQ4

M8DQ5

M7DQ6

L8DQ7

L2DQ8

M3DQ9

M2DQ10

P1DQ11

N2DQ12

R1DQ13

N3DQ14

R2DQ15

E8DQ16

D7DQ17

D8DQ18

B9DQ19

C8DQ20

A9DQ21

C7DQ22

A8DQ23

A2DQ24

C3DQ25

A1DQ26

C2DQ27

B1DQ28

D2DQ29

D3DQ30

E2

R8

N7

R9

N8

P9

M8

M7

L8

L2

M3

M2

P1

N2

R1

N3

R2

E8

D7

D8

B9

C8

A9

C7

A8

A2

C3

A1

C2

B1

D2

D3

E2

DQ31

AE19 MDATA U(0)

AD19 MDATA U(1)

AC19

AE20

MDATA U(2)

AD20

MDATA U(3)

AC20

MDATA U(4)

AE21

MDATA U(5)

AD21

MDATA U(6)

AE22

MDATA U(7)

AD22

MDATA U(8)

AC22

MDATA U(9)

AE23

MDATA U(10)

AD23

MDATA U(11)

AE24

MDATA U(12)

AC24

MDATA U(13)

AE25

MDATA U(14)

T20

MDATA U(15)

R24

MDATA U(16)

R23

MDATA U(17)

R21

MDATA U(18)

R20

MDATA U(19)

P25

MDATA U(20)

P24

MDATA U(21)

N25

MDATA U(22)

N24

MDATA U(23)

N23

MDATA U(24)

N21

MDATA U(25)

N20

MDATA U(26)

M25

MDATA U(27)

M20

MDATA U(28)

L20

MDATA U(29)

MDATA U(30)

P21

MDATA U(31)

F7

F3

G1

G2

G3

H1

H2

J3

G7

J7

H8

G9

G8

K9

K1

F8

F2

J2

J1

J8

J9

K7

K8

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

H9 A11

BA0

BA1

A1

A0

DQM0

DQM1

DQM2

DQM3

CKE

CLK

/CS

/RAS

/CAS

/WE

F7

F3

G1

G2

G3

H1

H2

J3

G7

J7

H8

G9

G8

K9

K1

F8

F2

J2

J1

J8

J9

K7

K8

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

A10

H9 A11

BA0

BA1

A1

A0

DQM0

DQM1

DQM2

DQM3

CKE

CLK

/CS

/RAS

/CAS

/WE

IC1103EDS1232ECBH-75-E

SDRAM

IC1102EDS1232ECBH-75-E

SDRAM

C21

C22

D23

D24

D25

E23

E24

E25

F25

MA

DD

R L

(13)

F21

MA

DD

R L

(11)

MA

DD

R L

(14)

B21

A22

A24

MA

DD

R L

(0)

MA

DD

R L

(1)

MA

DD

R L

(2)

MA

DD

R L

(3)

MA

DD

R L

(4)

MA

DD

R L

(5)

MA

DD

R L

(6)

MA

DD

R L

(7)

MA

DD

R L

(8)

MA

DD

R L

(9)

MA

DD

R L

(10)

A21

MD

QM

L(0

)

A20

MD

QM

L(1

)

B20

MD

QM

L(2

)

C20

MD

QM

L(3

)

H24

MC

KE

L

G25

MC

LK L

H23

XM

CS

L

B25

XM

RA

S L

C24

XM

CA

S L

H25

XM

WE

L

G23

AB

1E

DA

TA S

(6)

AA

3E

DA

TA S

(5)

AA

2E

DA

TA S

(4)

AA

1E

DA

TA S

(3)

AB

2E

DA

TA S

(7)

EA

DD

R S

(0)

EA

DD

R S

(1)

EA

DD

R S

(2)

Y2

ED

ATA

S(2

)

Y1

ED

ATA

S(1

)

W1

ED

ATA

S(0

)

XE

WR

S

AC

1X

EIN

T S

AC

3

XE

CS

SA

D3

XE

RD

S

AE

4

AE

3

AD

2

AE

2

AA

6R

DY

Y10

XE

CS

M

Y12

XE

WR

L M

AC

12X

EW

RU

M

AD

13X

ER

D M

AC

10X

EIN

T(0)

AC

11X

EIN

T(1)

G1

TRS

T

H6

TMS

F5TC

K

J6TD

O

AE

13X

RE

SE

T

L2S

TRO

BE

TM

G(1

)

L1S

TRO

BE

TM

G(0

)

Y19

EA

DD

R M

(0)

AA

19E

AD

DR

M(1

)

Y18

EA

DD

R M

(2)

AA

18E

AD

DR

M(3

)

AE

18E

AD

DR

M(4

)

Y17

EA

DD

R M

(5)

AA

17E

AD

DR

M(6

)

AC

17E

AD

DR

M(7

)

AD

17E

AD

DR

M(8

)

AE

17E

AD

DR

M(9

)

Y16

EA

DD

R M

(10)

AA

16E

AD

DR

M(1

1)

AD

16E

AD

DR

M(1

2)

AE

16E

AD

DR

M(1

3)

AA

15E

AD

DR

M(1

4)

AC

15E

AD

DR

M(1

5)

AD

15E

AD

DR

M(1

6)

AE

15E

AD

DR

M(1

7)

Y14

EA

DD

R M

(18)

AA

14E

AD

DR

M(1

9)

AC

14E

AD

DR

M(2

0)

AD

14E

AD

DR

M(2

1)

AE

14E

AD

DR

M(2

2)

AA

13E

AD

DR

M(2

3)

AC

13E

AD

DR

M(2

4)

Y6XHD CAM

R1CLK CAM

M1VCLK

U1ADATA(0)

U2ADATA(1)

U3ADATA(2)

V1ADATA(3)

V2ADATA(4)

V3ADATA(5)

W3ADATA(6)

Y3ADATA(7)

R2BDATA(0)

R3BDATA(1)

R5BDATA(2)

T1BDATA(3)

T2BDATA(4)

T3BDATA(5)

V5BDATA(6)

W5BDATA(7)

F6TGHD

B5TGVD

K3AUDO1

K6AUDO2

J2AUDI1

K2AUDI2

J1LRCLK

K5TDI

H1WCLK

B15RAW SDA(0) P

B14RAW SDA(0) N

A15RAW SCKA P

A14RAW SCKA N

C15RAW SDA(1) P

C14RAW SDA(1) N

B13RAW SDB(0) P

B12RAW SDB(0) N

A13RAW SCKB P

A12RAW SCKB N

C13RAW SDB(1) P

C12RAW SDB(1) N

D1

MC

CLK

A

C3

MC

DT

A(3

)

B2

MC

DT

A(2

)

C1

MC

DT

A(1

)

B1

MC

DT

A(0

)

D2

MC

CM

D A

EADDR M ADD0 to 24EDATA M DATA0 to 15

MACS RDYMACS XCSXEWRL MXEWRU MXERD M

MACS XINT1MACS XINT0MACS TDO

MACS XRSTST TMG 1

DVDD2.7VCARD CLK

CARD DAT3CARD DAT2CARD DAT1CARD DAT0CARD CMD

MADDR U0

XMWE U

XMCAS U

XMRAS U

XMCS U

MCLK U

MCKE U

MDQM U3

MDQM U2

MDQM U1

MDQM U0

MADDR U1

MADDR U2

MADDR U3

MADDR U4

MADDR U5

MADDR U6

MADDR U7

MADDR U8

MADDR U9

MADDR U10

MADDR U11

MADDR U13

MADDR U14

MADDR L0

XMWE L

XMCAS L

XMRAS L

XMCS L

MCLK L

MCKE L

MDQM L3

MDQM L2

MDQM L1

MDQM L0

MADDR L1

MADDR L2

MADDR L3

MADDR L4

MADDR L5

MADDR L6

MADDR L7

MADDR L8

MADDR L9

MADDR L10

MADDR L11

MADDR L13

MADDR L14

MDATA L0

MDATA L1

MDATA L2

MDATA L3

MDATA L4

MDATA L5

MDATA L6

MDATA L7

MDATA L8

MDATA L9

MDATA L10

MDATA L11

MDATA L12

MDATA L13

MDATA L14

MDATA L15

MDATA L16

MDATA L17

MDATA L18

MDATA L19

MDATA L20

MDATA L21

MDATA L22

MDATA L23

MDATA L24

MDATA L25

MDATA L26

MDATA L27

MDATA L28

MDATA L29

MDATA L30

MDATA L31

MDATA U0

MDATA U1

MDATA U2

MDATA U3

MDATA U4

MDATA U5

MDATA U6

MDATA U7

MDATA U8

MDATA U9

MDATA U10

MDATA U11

MDATA U12

MDATA U13

MDATA U14

MDATA U15

MDATA U16

MDATA U17

MDATA U18

MDATA U19

MDATA U20

MDATA U21

MDATA U22

MDATA U23

MDATA U24

MDATA U25

MDATA U26

MDATA U27

MDATA U28

MDATA U29

MDATA U30

MDATA U31


TOCVF SECTIONMAIN PCB

E DATA8 to 15E ADD0 to 2

XEWRUXERDTCKTMS

TRST

TORECORDER SECTION-2MAIN PCB

TOCARD, REAR PCB,HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTIONCARD PCBCN104

ED

ATA

14

ED

ATA

8

ED

ATA

9

ED

ATA

10

ED

ATA

11

ED

ATA

12

ED

ATA

13

ED

ATA

15

MA

CS

XC

S

MA

CS

RD

Y

MA

CS

XIN

T0

MA

CS

XIN

T1

MA

CS

TD

O

MA

CS

XR

ST

CAM A DATA0 to 7CAM B DATA0 to 7

XHD MACSCLK MACS

VCLK MACSLRCKWCK

BASIL TDOST TMG

DOUT00 PDOUT00 NTCLK00 PTCLK00 NDOUT01 PDOUT01 NDOUT10 PDOUT10 NTCLK01 PTCLK01 NDOUT11 PDOUT11 N

TGHDTGVD

DOUT00 P

DOUT00 N

TCLK00 P

TCLK00 N

DOUT01 P

DOUT01 N

DOUT10 P

DOUT10 N

TCLK01 P

TCLK01 N

DOUT11 P

DOUT11 N

CA

RD

CLK

CA

RD

DA

T3

CA

RD

DA

T2

CA

RD

DA

T1

CA

RD

DA

T0

CA

RD

CM

D



MACS CSMACS INT

AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRIAUD2 MACS TO VIC/TRI

AUD1 VIC TO MACSAUD2 VIC TO MACS


AUD1 MACS TO VIC/TRI


AUD1 VIC TO MACS

AUD2 VIC TO MACS

CN10238364243313339

DVDD2.7V

DVDD2.7V

MAIN PCB(2/10)

CAMERA SECTION-2


HV20 E

CAMERA SECTION-3


HV20 E


IC1613LMV324IPW

OPE AMP

IC1612BH2228FV

D/A CONVERTER

IC1611BH9972KN

SHIFT LENS DRIVER IC

A2CLK

D4DI

F6AELEV2

H4

F4

G4

E5

G2

F1

B4LD

E3

E6

D6

G7

C1

B1

F7

P5V

AVDD2.7V

Q1700

AIF/DA SOAIF/DA SCLK

DA LOADPWM IRISPWM VCMPWM NDPWM ZAPWM ZBND ENC

I SWY GYROP GYRO

I ENCZ PSV

ND F PSVIRIS CLI ENC

ND ENCZ RES SW

L TEMPLED RET

TOLENS UNIT


ND HALL OUT−ND HALL IN−

ND HALL OUT+ND HALL IN+ND DRIVE+ND DRIVE−

FOCUS TARGFOCUS DRIVE+FOCUS DRIVE−

ZOOM B−ZOOM B+ZOOM A−ZOOM A+

IG DRIVE+IG DRIVE−

IG HALL IN+IG HALL OUT+

IG HALL IN−IG HALL OUT−IG HALL OUT−ZOOM SENS

L TEMPZOOM LED

FOCUS VCCL TEMP 2.7VZOOM VCC

FOCUS ANABFOCUS ANAA

CN12001514131210114

17186879

262527282930312023221

242132

HALL2− IN

HALL2−OUT

HALL2+OUT

HALL2+ IN

OUT1

OUT1B

IG HALL IN(− )

IG HALL OUT(− )

IG HALL OUT(+ )

IG HALL IN(+ )

IG DRIVE−

IG DRIVE+

D7

B2

B5

B7

F8 VC

VM1

VM2

VM3

VM4.5

GYRIN1

GYRIN2

GYRLEV2

GYRLEV1

GAIN1.2

DAC5 OUT

IRIS CONT

Y GYRO

I ENC

AIF/DA SO

AIF/DA SCLK

Y GY OUT

P GY OUT

DA LOAD

P GYRO

I SW

IRIS CL

IC1200BH9970GU

LENS DRIVER

C6

B6

C4IN4

B3

C5

A4

A5

A3

C8

A6G8

OUT4

OUT4B

OUT5B

OUT5

OUT3B

ZOOM −A

ZOOM +A

ZOOM +B

ZOOM −B

B8 OUT3

D3 DAC3 OUTFOCUS TARG

H6

H7

F5

D8

G6

OUT2B

HALL1+ IN

HALL1− IN

HALL1+OUT

HALL1−OUT

ND DRIVE+

ND HALL IN(+ )

ND HALL IN(− )

ND HALL OUT(− )

ND HALL OUT(+ )

FOCUS DRIVE−

FOCUS DRIVE+

EN2.3

EN4.5

IN5

IN2

IN3

PWM ZA

ND F PSV

Z PSV

PWM ZB

PWM ND

PWM VCME2IN1

PWM IRIS

G5AELEV1ND ENC

AVDD 2.7V



MR ENC AD1MR ENC AD2

Y DRIVE AY DRIVE BP DRIVE BP DRIVE A

Y HALL OUT+Y HALL OUT−

Y HALL IN−Y HALL IN+

P HALL OUT−P HALL OUT+

P HALL IN−P HALL IN+

CN160056782314

1011129

DA TREELDA SREEL

DA CFG

P PWMY PWMI PSV

Y SENSP SENSDA1 CS

DA1/DA2/CG SCLKDA1/DA2/CG SO

TOSERVO SECTIONMAIN PCB

Y GY OUTP GY OUT


TOLENS UNIT

MISO/TINTEAFADMOSISCLKREADAFCLKCLK0CSAFVCCVCC

CN17001249

10121415168

13

EXTAF RXDEXTAF TINTE

EXTAF ADEXTAF TXDEXTAF SCK

EXTAF READ ENEXTAF CLK

EXTAF CLK0EXTAF CS

TOAUTO FOCUS ASS'Y


3

2

7

4

6

5

14

13

12

1

10

98

AVDD2.7VVCC

29

2

1 10

11

12

AVDD2.7VVDD

CSB

CLK

DI

AO1

AO2

4

3 AO3

AO4

5

6 NC2

NC1

4

13

10

1

15

P5VVM1

16 DVDD2.7VVDD

IN1

IN2

20VC

12VM4

19EN1

17EN2

11VM3

5VM2

OUT2

OUT2B

3

6 OUT1

OUT1B

Y DRIVE A

Y DRIVE B

P DRIVE A

P DRIVE B

AVDD 3.2V

MAIN PCB(3/10)

CPU BUS SIGNAL USB SIGNAL


D3

DIN

T(E

JTA

G)

C1

PC

ST0

(EJT

AG

)

E2

PC

ST1

(EJT

AG

)

D2

PC

ST2

(EJT

AG

)

C2

PC

ST3

(EJT

AG

)

E4

PC

ST4

(EJT

AG

)

E1

DC

LK(E

JTA

G)

F3

EJE

(EJT

AG

)

P11EADDR M ADD1

T13EADDR M ADD2

V13EADDR M ADD3

U13EADDR M ADD4

N11EADDR M ADD5

R13EADDR M ADD6

V14EADDR M ADD7

T14EADDR M ADD8

P12EADDR M ADD9

V15EADDR M ADD10

U15EADDR M ADD11

P13EADDR M ADD12

R14EADDR M ADD13

V16EADDR M ADD14

T15EADDR M ADD16

V17EADDR M ADD17

T16EADDR M ADD18

U17EADDR M ADD19

R15EADDR M ADD20

P14EADDR M ADD21

N14EADDR M ADD22

B12 EJECT SW

U16EADDR M ADD15

E1A0

D1A1

C1A2

A1A3

B1A4

D2A5

C2A6

A2A7

B5A8

A5A9

C5A10

D5A11

B6A12

A6A13

C6A14

E6A16

B2A17

C3A18

D4A19

D6A15

T17EDATA M DATA0

T18EDATA M DATA1

P15EDATA M DATA2

R16EDATA M DATA3

R17EDATA M DATA4

R18EDATA M DATA5

M13EDATA M DATA6

M14EDATA M DATA7

P16EDATA M DATA8

P18EDATA M DATA9

P17EDATA M DATA10

L13EDATA M DATA11

N18EDATA M DATA12

N15EDATA M DATA13

N17EDATA M DATA14

L14EDATA M DATA15

E2 DQ0

H2 DQ1

E3 DQ2

H3 DQ3

H4 DQ4

E4 DQ5

H5 DQ6

E5 DQ7

F2 DQ8

G2 DQ9

F3 DQ10

G3 DQ11

F4 DQ12

G5 DQ13

F5 DQ14

G6 DQ15

L17FM XCS

R11FM XRST

H17XERD M

H15XEWRU M

F1 CE

B4 RST

A4 WE

G1 OE

H14XEWRL M

K15

MA

CS

XIN

T1

K16

MA

CS

XIN

T0

V10

MA

CS

XR

ST

E3

TRS

T(E

JTA

G)

H6

TCK

(EJT

AG

)

F2

TMS

(EJT

AG

)

G2

TDI(

EJT

AG

)

M1

TPC

O(E

JTA

G)

A3

J16

A9 B11 V11B13 V6

R12

G1 CCM RESET

IC100TMP19A64C1DXBG

CCM MI-COM

IC101SST39VF1601-70-4I-B3KE

FLASH

EADDR M ADD0

EADDR M ADD1

EADDR M ADD2

EADDR M ADD3

EADDR M ADD4

EADDR M ADD5

EADDR M ADD6

EADDR M ADD7

EADDR M ADD8

EADDR M ADD9

EADDR M ADD10

EADDR M ADD11

EADDR M ADD12

EADDR M ADD13

EADDR M ADD14

EADDR M ADD16

EADDR M ADD17

EADDR M ADD18

D3NC3EADDR M ADD20

EADDR M ADD19

EADDR M ADD15

EDATA M DATA0

EDATA M DATA1

EDATA M DATA2

EDATA M DATA3

EDATA M DATA4

EDATA M DATA5

EDATA M DATA6

EDATA M DATA7

EDATA M DATA8

EDATA M DATA9

EDATA M DATA10

EDATA M DATA11

EDATA M DATA12

EDATA M DATA13

EDATA M DATA14

EDATA M DATA15

FM XCS

FM XRST

XEWRU M

XERD M

AFE

TX

D

MP

X X

RS

T

CC

D T

EM

P

MPX XCS1

AFE

SC

K

TG X

RS

T

N2

TG T

XD

N3

TG S

CK

AFE

B X

CS

U2

BA

RR

SW

EN

D11

IRIS

CL

F11A12

ND

F P

SV

Z P

SV

G17

CA

M O

N

P7

AFE

R X

CS

N8

TG X

CS

R7

AFE

G X

CS

B5KEY AD1

F15MACS XCS2

H16RDY

F16MACS XCS3

H18MACS XCS0

G15MACS XCS1

D1

TDO

(EJT

AG

)

EADDR M ADD0

C3 V12 T11

L TE

MP

Z R

ES

SW

LED

RE

T

B4

I E

NC

A4

ND

EN

C

VTR POW SW

CAM POW SW

K1P.AE/GREEN SW

P1START/STOP SW

C14 VTR ON

U10 DC V DET

A8 DC V A/D

C7 BATT TEMP

A13 VTR ON SUB

B15 SUB SCP OFF

B10 CAM MINUS1.2 ON

E12 CHG CTL1

D7 A/D I

A7 BATT A/D

T3 IC3201 CSL

T7 IC3201 VTOM CLK

V7 IC3201 MTOV DATA

U7 IC3201 VTOM DATA

E11 CHG CTL

G13 DC J DET

F14 B E3DET

N1 H PHOTO SW

C16 T/C POW SW

U11 PHOTO SW

A10 DIRECTPRINT LED

M5 B MO CONT1

N5 B MO CONT2

D13 VIDEO LIGHT ON

C4 ZOOM AD

M4 COM POW LED

C12 ACCESS & CHARGE LED

C6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D1

B6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D2

L6 MON SENSE

D12 HDMI RST

V4 TX SDA(I2C)

U4 TX SCL(I2C)

TX SDA(I2C)

TX SCL(I2C)

TX SDA(I2C)

TX SCL(I2C)TX SDA(I2C)

TX SCL(I2C)

D6 CASSETTEMEMORY A/D0

P4 HDMI HPD

E14 CAS IN

T4 MIC ON

A5 KEY AD0

D14 ST EFCHG(0)

B3 ST VDHGL(0)

T12 ST TMG ON

U3 MF CCW SW

A6 KEY AD3

B8 KEY AD4

P6 MF CW SW

B14 EXT IN INFO

B9 FR FM END

C15 FIELD INDEX0

A15 MACS FREEZE REQ

J3 CARD DET

M16 SHOE ON

E9 ST VDHGL(1)

C5 KEY AD2

G14 B RESET

K18 RMC PULSE IN

P3 BARRSW CLOSE

R2 BARRSW OPEN

9 OUT3 4IN1

P5 B MO ENABLE3ENA

10 OUT4

8 OUT1

7 OUT2

2IN2

IC104LB1935T

MOTOR DRIVER IC

CHG CTL2

CHG CTL1

E7 EXTAF AD

T10 EXTAF TXD

P10 EXTAF SCK

M18 EXTAF READ EN

U1 EXTAF CLK

L18 EXTAF CLK0

F18 EXTAF CS

R10 EXTAF RXD

R1 EXTAF TINTE

D16

E16

MTOV EN

FCH 0

VTOM DATA

MTOV DATA

VTOM SCK

NTSC XPAL

D10

USB XINT0 L5

MACS CAM MODE T6

VTOM CS K14

R9

T9

P9

E13

E17

IC105TC7WZ00FKNAND GATE

IC102TC7SZ86FU

EX-OR GATE

IC106TC7SZ86FU

EX-OR GATE

IC103TC7SZ08AFE

AND GATE

IC107TC7WZ02FKNOR GATE

EADDR M ADD23

EADDR M ADD22

USB XCS

EADDR M ADD24

IC2301(1/3)MB87Q1211BGL-GE1

VIC HDV

C11SCS(5)/PIO

W23VF B2

V25VF G2

W5 EADDR(B)/PIO

V27 VF G1

U2 SDR CKE/PIO

AE5EDACK/PIO

V26 VF B1

M26

ROFS/PIO

Y22 VF R1

N23

CSYNC O

E13SCLK(1)/PIO

F12SCS(4)/PIO

AC3EXT RDY2/PI

E11 SCS(0)/PIO

W6 C LKON/PIOF13SO(1)/PIO

E12SI(1)/PIO

U27VF R2

F25CDATA(4)/PIO

D27CDATA(3)/PIO

F9

A9

SCS(6)/PIO

SCS(7)/PIO

2 OI1

1IO1

3CONT2

7CONT1

6 OI25IO2

IC109TC7W66FK

ANALOG SWITCH

IC108TC7PA19AFE

CHIP SELECT DECODER

C10

XR

ES

ET

MAIN PCB(4/10)

TO CAMERA SECTION-1MAIN PCB


MACS RDYMACS XCS


XEWRL MXEWRU MXERD M

MACS XINT0MACS XINT1MACS XRSTMACS TDO


CAM ONXERD M

XEWRL MCCD TEMPAFE SCKAFE TXD

AFEG XCSAFEB XCSAFER XCS

TG XCSTG SCKTG TXD

TG XRSTMPX XRSTMPX XCSMPX RDY


L TEMPI ENC

LED RETIRIS CL

Z RES SWZ PSV

ND F PSVND ENC

E3+LIE3VE1.4V

CN102357

13181026283014171912202123158

11252

1624

D+D−

VBUSACCESS & CHARGE LED

CAM POW LEDP.AE/GREEN SW

SP+SP−

CARD DETSTART/STOP SW

VTR POW SWCAM POW SW

KEY AD1KEY AD0

PHOTO SWH PHOTO SWT/C POW SW

ZOOM ADVTR UNREG

AVDD2.7VLI RESETDVDD2.7VLI POW2

DEBCLKDEBUDDEBDD

XDEBEN

BARRSW LEDBARRMO OUT3BARRMO OUT4BARRMO OUT1BARRMO OUT2BARRSW OPEN

BARRSW CLOSERMC IN

WHITE LED



EJECT SWCN101

2


LI POWVBATT

VTR ONB RESET

CCM RESETE3+LIE3V

E1.4VDC V A/D

A/D IBATT A/D

IC3201 CSLIC3201 VTOM CLK

IC3201 MTOV DATAIC3201 VTOM DATA

DC V DETB E3DET

CHG CTL1CHG CTL2DC J DET

VTR ON SUBSUB SCP OFF

CAM MINUS1.2 ONBATT TEMPLCD BL ON

TOPOWER SUPPLY SECTIONMAIN PCB Q100

Q106Q102Q105

Q107

E3V

D100

D101AVDD2.7VLENS LOGIC

P5.15V

Q104


XERD MXEWRU MXEWRL MMTOV EN

VTOM DATAMTOV DATA VTOM SCKNTSC XPAL

FCH 0VTOM CS

MACS CAM MODEUSB XCS

USB XINT0VTR POW SWCAM POW SW


XRESETTX SDA(I2C)TX SCL(I2C)

71

2

36

5

41

2

41

2

41

3

1

6

4

2

71

2

36

5

HPDTX SDA(I2C)TX SCL(I2C)MON SENSE

HDMI RSTST EFCHG

ST TMG ONST VDHGL(0)

D+D−

VBUS

CAS INMIC ON

MIC1MIC2MIC3


E3VTPCOPCST0PCST2PCST4

EJEDINTTCKTMSTDOTDI

TRSTPCST1PCST3DCLK

CCM RESETDEBCLKDEBUDDEBDD

XDEBEN

CN100A9A4A1A2A3B9A8A7B7A6B6A5B2B3B4B8

B12A11B11A10

NCE3V

VF R LCD

VF B LCD

VF G LCDVF G EVF

EVF 3V ON

EVF 5V ON

PANEL BT SW

C SYNC

VF R EVF

VF B EVF

LCD ON

EVF SEN

PANEL OPEN SW

LCD EEP CS V

LCD EEP SIN V

LCD/EEP SO

LCD/EEP SCLK

LCD CS

FR FM END

FIELD INDEX0

MACS FREEZE REQ

EXT IN INFO


SHOE ONST VDHGL(1)

DIRECTPRINT LEDKEY AD2KEY AD3KEY AD4

MF CW SWMF CCW SW

C SYNCLCD/EEP SCLK

LCD/EEP SOLED EEP CS VLCD/EEP SIN V

LCD CSLCD ON

VF R LCDVF B LCDVF G LCD

PANEL BT SWPANEL OPEN SW

VF G EVFVF R EVFVF B EVFEVF SEN

EVF 3V ONEVF 5V ON


XRESETSP +SP −

EXTAF CLKEXTAF CLK0EXTAF TXDEXTAF RXDEXTAF SCKEXTAF CSEXTAF AD

EXTAF READ ENEXTAF TINTE

Q110

Q103

DVDD2.7V

AVDD2.7VVTR UNREG

Q101

TOCARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC SECTIONREAR PCB

TOCARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTIONCARD PCBCN104


SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION


HV20 E

CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL

IC300BD6303GVW

MOTOR DRIVER IC

PGFG

FG

FG

DRUMMOTOR

CAPSTANMOTOR

MODE SW

LOADINGMOTOR

DEW SENSOR

CASSETTE IN SW

TAKE UPREEL

FG SUPPLYREEL

MIC

SAFETYSW

CN302W 10

1134129657

WVVUU

COIL COMDPGDFG

SENS COM

CN300BOT E 1BOT C 2EOT E 20EOT C 21LED A 14LED K 15

REC PRF 5MIC3 4MIC2

AVDD2.7V

6MIC1 7C IN 12TIN− 8TIN+ 10

TOUT− 9TOUT+ 11

SIN− 16SIN+ 18

SOUT− 17SOUT+ 19

AVDD2.7V

AVDD2.7V

AVDD2.7V

P5V

CN303C H− 12W− 11W+ 10

C H+ 9U+ 8U− 7V+ 6V− 5

CFG2 4CFG1 1UCOIL 18UCOIL 17WCOIL 16WCOIL 15VCOIL 14VCOIL 13

CFG VCC 2

CN3016712

DEW+ 8MSW SENS 5MSW VCC 4MSW VSS 3

A4 C.FGSMT

B7 D.PGSMT

C7 D.FGSMT

D4 D.EC

D10 L.FBR

C3 D.PS

J3 C.PS

J2 C.FBR

K2 C.EC

D1

B1

B2

D5D.COM

D.U2

D.V1

C2D.V2

A1D.U1

E1D.W2

D.W1

A6

C6

D6D.FGIN−

D.FGPGIN+

D.PGIN−

H6C.HW−

G6C.HW+

K5C.HU+

J5C.HU−

H5C.HV+

G5C.HV−

F3L.REV1

E3L.FWD2

E2L.FWD1

F2L.REV2

H7R.IN−1

K8R.IN+1

K9R.IN−2

G7R.IN+2

G2C.U1

H1C.V1

H2C.V2

G4C.W1

G3C.U2

H3C.W2

CFG

DPG

DFG

CFGDPGDFG

DERRLMO FRBLLMO FRBHDRUM ONCAP ON

CAP FRBLCAP FRBH

CERRTREELSREEL

DA CFGDEW ADMSW AD

TAPE TOPTAPE ENDTAPE LED

REC PROOFREEL LED CONT

DA TREELDA SREEL

J7 R.OUT1

J8 R.OUT2

G9 LED K

G10 TAPE LED

J10 R.H−

H8 R.PS

MIC1MIC2MIC3

Q300

C5C.FGIN−

B5C.FGIN+

LOAD(− )LOAD(− )

LOAD(+ )

LOAD(+ )

Q301

BOT DET

Q301

EOT DET

MIC ONCAS IN




TAPE TOPSENSOR

TAPE ENDSENSOR

DMC I I IMAIN PCB(5/10)

SERVO SECTION


HV20 E

DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNALANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNAL DIGITAL ( IMAGE+AUDIO SIGNAL)ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL




IC2801MB87S1192BGL-GE1

BASEBAND ICB5

C5

D5

A4

A2

ADATA CAM(0)

ADATA CAM(1)

ADATA CAM(2)

ADATA CAM(7)

ADATA CAM(3)

B4

C4

A3

ADATA CAM(4)

ADATA CAM(5)

ADATA CAM(6)

D1

D2

D3

E1

F4

BDATA CAM(0)

BDATA CAM(1)

BDATA CAM(2)

BDATA CAM(7)

BDATA CAM(3)

E2

E3

F1

BDATA CAM(4)

BDATA CAM(5)

BDATA CAM(6)

T12

R12

P12

U13

P14

ADATA VIC(0)

ADATA VIC(1)

ADATA VIC(2)

ADATA VIC(7)

ADATA VIC(3)

T13

R13

U14

ADATA VIC(4)

ADATA VIC(5)

ADATA VIC(6)

N15

M17

M16

M15

L14

BDATA VIC(0)

BDATA VIC(1)

BDATA VIC(2)

BDATA VIC(7)

BDATA VIC(3)

M14

L17

L16

BDATA VIC(4)

BDATA VIC(5)

BDATA VIC(6)

N17

P16

K17

VCLK IN

VSYNC

CCLK IN

U16

T15

U17

DOT CLK

VD

HD

R17

R16

R15

P17

OSD DATA(0)

OSD DATA(1)

OSD DATA(2)

OSD DATA(3)

A6 D DETECT

C16 D ID1/GPO(18)/MONI(2)

C8 Y

C11 PB

A9 PR

C1

G1

B2

CLK CAM

VCLK CAM

XHD CAM

IC2800MBG119APBS-ME1

HDV CODEC IC

C27

A26

B26

B25

C23

STDATA0

STDATA1

STDATA2

STDATA7

STDATA3

C25

A24

B24

STDATA4

STDATA5

STDATA6

R8

U9

T9

P9

U11

AHDATA COD(0)

AHDATA COD(1)

AHDATA COD(2)

AHDATA COD(7)

AHDATA COD(3)

U10

R10

P10

AHDATA COD(4)

AHDATA COD(5)

AHDATA COD(6)

AE16

AD16

AG18

AE18

AD22

EDATA00

EDATA01

EDATA02

EDATA15

EDATA03

AD18

AG19

AF19

EDATA04

EDATA05

EDATA06

AE19

AG20

EDATA07

EDATA08

AF20EDATA09

AE21

AD21

AG22

EDATA10

EDATA11

EDATA12

AF22

AE22

EDATA13

EDATA14

AG23

AF23

AE23

AD23

AB27

EADDR00

EADDR01

EADDR02

EADDR18

EADDR03

AG24

AF24

AD24

EADDR04

EADDR05

EADDR06

AF25

AE25

EADDR07

EADDR08

AD25EADDR09

AF26

AE26

AD26

EADDR10

EADDR11

EADDR12

AF27

AE27

EADDR13

EADDR14

AC27EADDR15

AC25

AC24

EADDR16

EADDR17

G3

H1

H2

H4

N1

EDATA(0)

EDATA(1)

EDATA(2)

EDATA(15)

EDATA(3)

N2

N3

N4

P1

R1

EADDER(0)

EADDER(1)

EADDER(2)

R2

P3

T1

XERD

XEWRL

XECS

EADDER(5)

EADDER(3)

P4EADDER(4)

J1

J3

J4

EDATA(4)

EDATA(5)

EDATA(6)

K1

K2

EDATA(7)

EDATA(8)

K3EDATA(9)

L1

L2

L3

EDATA(10)

EDATA(11)

EDATA(12)

L4

M4

EDATA(13)

EDATA(14)

A23

D23STREQ

STCLK

C22

D22

D21

STEN

STSTART

STEND

B1

E3AUD2 O

WCK

C3

C2

D3

LRCK

AUD1 I

AUD2 I

D2AUD1 O

G25

G24

F24

F25

E26

TSD0

TSD1

TSD2

TSD7

TSD3

F26

F27

E24

TSD4

TSD5

TSD6

D27

E27TSVALID

TSCLK

D26

D24

TDIR

TSSYNC

IC2802MAX4382EEE

COMPONENT DRIVER

OUTB INB+ 1210

INC+ 14

OUTC INA+ 516

OUTADISABLEA 1

7

INA−6

INC−15

INB−11

AC3

AC4

AB1

AB2

AA4

AHDATA0

AHDATA1

AHDATA2

AHDATA7

AHDATA3

AB3

AB4

AA3

AHDATA4

AHDATA5

AHDATA6

Y26

AA25

AA24

W25

AA26

XERD

XEWRU

XEWRL

XERROR

XECS

AB26

AA27

ERDY

HIRQOUT

U3

U5

P5

XRESET

TDO

T5TMS

U4TCK

T3TRST

TDI

Y27

AB25

W24

T24

XRESET

TRST

TDO

TCK

V24

V25

TMS

TDI

R5

U6

T6

P6

P7

BHDATA COD(0)

BHDATA COD(1)

BHDATA COD(2)

BHDATA COD(7)

BHDATA COD(3)

U7

T7

R7

BHDATA COD(4)

BHDATA COD(5)

BHDATA COD(6)

AG4

AF1

AF2

AF3

AE4

BHDATA0

BHDATA1

BHDATA2

BHDATA7

U12CLK CODEC AA1 HDVCLK

U8VCLK CODEC W1 VCLK

BHDATA3

AF4

AE2

AE3

BHDATA4

BHDATA5

BHDATA6

DISABLEC 2

DISABLEB 3

IC2830TDA9983BHW/8/C1

HDMI IC

36 TX2P

35 TX2N

20 DSCL

44 CSDA

42 RST

43 CSCL

17 INTR

19 DSDA

18 HPD

27 TXCP

26 TXCN

30 TX0P

29 TX0N

33 TX1P

32 TX1N

12

11

10

BCLK

AP0

63VB3(Y7)

64VB2(Y6)

65VB1(Y5)

67VB0(Y4)

76VA3(Y3)

77VA2(Y2)

78VA1(Y1)

79VA0(Y0)

53VC3(CB7.CR7)

VC2(CB6.CR6)

VC1(CB5.CR5)

VC0(CB4.CR4)

VA7(CB3.CR3)

54

VA6(CB2.CR2)

55

VA5(CB1.CR1)

56

VA4(CB0.CR0)

68

69

70

75

PCLK IN 66

D14 DATA Y(7)/GPO(7)



E15 DATA Y(4)/GPO(4)

E16 DATA Y(3)/GPO(3)

F14 DATA Y(2)/GPO(2)



A12 DATA CRCB(7)/GPO(15)

DATA CRCB(6)/GPO(14)




D13


C13

DATA CRCB(1)/GPO(9)

B13

DATA CRCB(0)/GPO(8)

C14

B14

A14

B15

CLK SDIE17

AP1

IC2831TC7PA04FU

DUAL INVERTER IC

IC2833TC74VHC74FT

PRESETAND CLEAR

2Q

1CK

1D

2CK

WC

K

LRC

K

AUD1 VIC TO AIF

CAM A DATA0

CAM A DATA1

CAM A DATA2

CAM A DATA3

CAM A DATA4

CAM A DATA5

CAM A DATA6

CAM A DATA7

CAM B DATA0

CAM B DATA1

CAM B DATA2

CAM B DATA3

CAM B DATA4

CAM B DATA5

CAM B DATA6

CAM B DATA7

VIC A DATA0

VIC A DATA1

VIC A DATA2

VIC A DATA3

VIC A DATA4

VIC A DATA5

VIC A DATA6

VIC A DATA7

VIC B DATA0

VIC B DATA1

VIC B DATA2

VIC B DATA3

VIC B DATA4

VIC B DATA5

VIC B DATA6

VIC B DATA7

27M

CCLK

VIC HD DOTCLK

VIC OSD VD

VIC OSD HD

VIC HD VD

VIC OSD DATA0

VIC OSD DATA1

VIC OSD DATA2

VIC OSD DATA3

CN280034323028263312131415161123456789

101718192040424344373936

D DETD ID1

PRPBY

D ID3P5V

ST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGSTROBE3V

BARRMO OUT2(A− )BARRMO OUT1(A)

BARRMO OUT4(B− )BARRMO OUT3(B)BARRSW CLOSE

BARRSW LEDBARRSW OPEN

WHITE LEDRMC IN

ST TMG ONST TMG

ST EFCHGST VDHGL

AV REXT L

ADV/EXT MIC REXT P DET

AV JACK DETAV L/HP LV I /O/HP R

V I /O/HP RAV JACK DET

AV L/HP LAV REXT L


BARRMO OUT2BARRMO OUT1BARRMO OUT4BARRMO OUT3

BARRSW CLOSEBARRSW LED

BARRSW OPENWHITE LED

RMC INST TMG ONST EFCHG

ST VDHGL(0)ST TMG

ST DATA0

ST DATA1

ST DATA2

ST DATA3

ST DATA4

ST DATA5

ST DATA6

ST DATA7

AH DATA0

AH DATA1

AH DATA2

AH DATA3

AH DATA4

AH DATA5

AH DATA6

AH DATA7

E DATA0

E DATA1

E DATA2

E DATA3

E DATA4

E DATA5

E DATA6

E DATA15

E DATA7

E DATA8

E DATA9

E DATA10

E DATA11

E DATA12

E DATA13

E DATA14

E ADD0

E ADD1

E ADD2

E ADD3

E ADD4

E ADD5

E ADD6

E ADD18

E ADD7

E ADD8

E ADD9

E ADD10

E ADD11

E ADD12

E ADD13

E ADD14

E ADD15

E ADD16

E ADD17

E DATA0

E DATA1

E DATA2

E DATA3

E DATA4

E DATA5

E DATA6

E DATA15

E ADD0

E ADD1

E ADD2

XERD

XEWRL

BASIL CS

E ADD3

E ADD4

E ADD5

E DATA7

E DATA8

E DATA9

E DATA10

E DATA11

E DATA12

E DATA13

E DATA14

ST CLK

ST EN

ST START

ST END

ST REQ

WCK

LRCK



AUD1 TRIP TO VIC

AUD2 TRIP TO VIC

TSD0

TSD1

TSD2

TSD3

TSD4

TSD5

TSD6

TSD7

TSCLK

TDIR

TSSYNC

TSVALID

CLK MACS

VCLK MACS

XHD MACS

V I /O/HP RLET CONT

WIDE CONTMUTE D

VIC A DATA0 to 7VIC B DATA0 to 7

VIC OSD DATA0 to 327M

CCLKVIC HD DOTCLK

VIC OSD VDVIC OSD HDVIC HD VD

CAM A DATA0 to 7CAM B DATA0 to 7

CLK MACSVCLK MACSXHD MACS



Q2800

Q2810Q2809




ST DATA0 to 7ST CLKST EN

ST STARTST ENDST REQ

TSD0 to 7TSCLKTDIR

TSSYNCTSVALID


AUD1 TRIP TO VICAUD2 TRIP TO VIC

E DATA0 to 15E ADD0 to 18

XERDXEWRUXEWRL

BASIL CSTRIPLETS CS

TRIPLETS RDYTRIPLETS INT1TRIPLETS INT2TRIPLETS TDO

TRIPLETS BASIL XRESETTRSTTCKTMS

LINKS TDOBASIL TDO

WCKLRCK

AUD1 VIC TO AIF

AH DATA0

AH DATA1

AH DATA2

AH DATA3

AH DATA4

AH DATA5

AH DATA6

AH DATA7

XERD

XEWRU

XEWRL

TRIPLETS CS

TRIPLETS RDY

TRIPLETS INT1

TRIPLETS INT2

BH DATA0

BH DATA1

BH DATA2

BH DATA3

BH DATA4

BH DATA5

BH DATA6

BH DATA7

BH DATA0

BH DATA1

BH DATA2

BH DATA3

BH DATA4

BH DATA5

BH DATA6

BH DATA7

TRIPLETS BASILXRESET

BASIL TDO

TMS

TCK

TRST

TRIPLETS TDO

TRIPLETS BASILXRESET

TRST

TCK

TMS

LINKS TDO

TRIPLETS TDO

Q2808

STROBE3V

P5.15V

ST UNREG

CN28301817151412119865243

D2+D2−D1+D1−D0+D0−

CLOCK+CLOCK−

SCLSDAHPD+5V+5V

SCL

SDA

HPD

CLOCK+

CLOCK−

D0+

D0−

D1+

D1−

D2+

D2−

HDMI5V

HPDMON SENSETX SDA(I2C)TX SCL(I2C)

HDMI RST

16

34

92

11 3

DATA Y0

DATA Y1

DATA Y2

DATA Y3

DATA Y4

DATA Y5

DATA Y6

DATA Y7

DATA CRCB0

CLK SDI

DATA CRCB1

DATA CRCB2

DATA CRCB3

DATA CRCB4

DATA CRCB5

DATA CRCB6

DATA CRCB7

DATA Y0

DATA Y1

DATA Y2

DATA Y3

DATA Y4

DATA Y5

DATA Y6

DATA Y7

DATA CRCB0

CLK SDI

DATA CRCB1

DATA CRCB2

DATA CRCB3

DATA CRCB4

DATA CRCB5

DATA CRCB6

DATA CRCB7

TOJACK PCB, FRONT COVERASS'Y SECTIONJACK PCBCN501


TOCARD, REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTIONHDMI FPC ASS'YCN10

MAIN PCB(6/10)

RECORDER SECTION-1


HV20 E

DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNALANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNALIEEE 1394 SIGNAL


IC2309TC7WZ08FKAND GATE

IC2308TC7SZ08AFE

AND GATE

IC2301 (2/3)MB87Q1211BGL-GE1

VIC HDV

E1

C2

A2

B5

A5

C5

D5

B6

A6

C6

D6

E6

B2

C3

D4

D3

A0

A20

F1 BEF

G1 OE

A4 WE

B4 RST

D1

C1

A1

B1

D2

IC2310SST34HF324G-70-4E-L3KE

FLASH/SRAM

E2 DQ0

H2

E3

H3

H4

E4

H5

E5

F2

G2

F3

G3

F4

G5

F5

G6 DQ15

ED

ATA

(0)

ED

ATA

(15)

XE

CS

(0)

XE

RD

XE

WR

U

TRS

T

XR

ES

ET

L6

G5

G6

H6 J1 J2 J3 J5 J6 K1

K2

K3

K5

K6 L1 L2 L5

PIO

(9)

G1

M1

M2

M3

M5

M6

N1

N2

N3

N5

N6

P2

P3

P5

R1

R2

R3

R5

R6

T2

T3

T5

T6EADDR(22)

SCS(3)/PIOB11

CLAMP PWMAF24

COMP INAE26

VRH1AA26

AGC PWMAG22

BYPASSAA23

COMP FBY26

COMP OAG27

CDATA(1)/PIOD25

W3

XE

CS

(2)/

PIO

W1

V5

V6

XE

WR

LU

3

AG

7

AB

3

B10

A11

TMS

AIF

/DA

SC

LK

AIF

CS

AIF

/DA

SO

I S

W

DA

LO

AD

LIN

KS

IN

T

LIN

KS

CS

PWM ZA

P SENS

C15

LRC

K

SC

LK(2

)/P

IO

SC

S(1

)/P

IO

G22Y SENS

AIN(10)

T26HP ON

D(1)/PIO

T25HP MUTE

LREQ/PIO

H22ND ENC

AIN(6)

K27I ENC

AIN(5)

K25MR ENC AD2

AIN(3)

J22MR ENC AD1

AIN(2)

AG

1

TCK

AG

2

TDO

AF7

XE

INT2

/PI

AA

3

XE

CS

(6)/

PIO

Y2

AM

CK

B15

ED

RE

Q/P

IOA

F6

SC

S(1

0)/P

IOA

8D

A1

CS

SC

S(8

)/P

IOC

8I

PS

BS

I(0)

/PIO

A12

DA

1/D

A2/

CG

SO

SO

(0)/

PIO

C12

DA

1/D

A2/

CG

SC

LKS

CLK

(0)/

PIO

B13

ID0

IDIR

PIO

(8)

H1

ICLK

BG

RN

TX/P

IOG

2X

IV

BR

Q/P

IOG

3X

ILW

RE

SD

LSE

L/P

IOF6

XTS

PIO

(5)

A1

ID1

PIO

(6)

B2

ID2

D(2

)/P

IOC

2ID

3D

(3)/

PIO

E3

ID4

D(4

)/P

IOD

3ID

5D

(5)/

PIO

F3ID

6D

(6)/

PIO

F2ID

7D

(7)/

PIO

F1

PWM(1)/PIOR27

AIN(11)J27

WC

KF1

6

SO

(2)/

PIO

C10

J26

U22

P GYRO

XP

DI

RE

C M

UTE

A IN(13)

V1

EX

T R

DY

1/P

IE

XT

DE

T

Y5

EX

T R

DY

41/P

IO

F23Y GYRO

AIN(12)

P27Y PWM

PWM(6)/PIO

P22P PWM

PWM(7)/PIO

LPS

/PIO

EX

T R

DY

42/P

IOY

6

SO

UN

DS

OU

ND

P25

PWM ZBPWM(0)/PIOT23

PWM VCMPWM(3)/PIOR23

PWM IRISPWM(4)/PIOR25

PWM NDPWM(5)/PIOR22

EADDR(0)

C4 LBS

F6 UBS

A3 BES

IC2303MB87M4771BGL-GE1

1394 IC

A17

AU

D1

I

E19

AU

D1

O

N13

N12

N11

M11

M10

N10

M9

L8

M3

N2

N3

M8

L3

M2

N7

L7

A12

B12

A13

C12

B13

A11

C11

A10

B10

C8

A8

B8

C7

M7

E12

E13

E11

F12

F11

G12

G13

G11

H11

J12

J13

J11

K13

B1

B2

A1

A2

B3

B4

A4

B5

A5

C5

A6

A7

J1

J2

L2

K1

K2

L11

L13

L12

71

2

41

2

35

6

A M

UTE

42

4041

28

26

39

44

45

27

25

36

35

31

29

21

20

223 2413

12

7

6

5

4

3

14 16 17

34810471932

IC801AK4567

AIF4

V I/O/HP RAV JACK DET

AV RAV L/HP L

E ADD0

E ADD6

E ADD7

E ADD8

E ADD9

E ADD10

E ADD11

E ADD12

E ADD13

E ADD14

E ADD15

E ADD16

E ADD17

E ADD18

E ADD19

E ADD20

E ADD1

E ADD2

E ADD3

E ADD4

E ADD5

E ADD0

E ADD6

LINKS CS

E ADD1

E ADD2

E ADD3

E ADD4

E ADD5


E DATA0

E DATA1

E DATA2

E DATA3

E DATA4

E DATA5

E DATA6

E DATA7

E DATA8

E DATA9

E DATA10

E DATA11

E DATA12

E DATA13

E DATA14

E DATA15

E ADD0 to 18E DATA0 to 15

XERDXEWRUXEWRLTRSTTMSTCK

LINKS TDO


XRESET


E ADD0 to 2E DATA8 to 15

XERDXEWRU

TRSTTMSTCK

PWM ZBPWM ZA

PWM VCMPWM IRISPWM NDY PWMP PWM

P GYROY GYROP SENSY SENSND ENC

I ENCMR ENC AD2MR ENC AD1

I SWDA LOADDA1 CS

I PSVDA1/DA2/CG SO

DA1/DA2/CG SCLKAIF/DA SCLK

AIF/DA SO


LINE IN

XECS

LINKS INTXINT

XTS

XILWRE

XIV

ICLK

IDIR

ID7

ID6

ID5

ID4

ID3

ID2

ID1

ID0

XERD

TMS

TCK

TRST

XRESET

TDO

TDI

XEWRU

EADDR6

EADDR5

EADDR4

EADDR3

EADDR2

EADDR1

EADDR0

EDATA15

EDATA14

EDATA13

EDATA12

EDATA11

EDATA10

EDATA9

EDATA8

EDATA7

EDATA6

EDATA5

EDATA4

EDATA3

EDATA2

EDATA1

EDATA0

Q2102

75Ω

Q2103

E DATA0

E DATA1

E DATA2

E DATA3

E DATA4

E DATA5

E DATA6

E DATA7

E DATA8

E DATA9

E DATA10

E DATA11

E DATA12

TDIR

TSCLK

TSSYNC

TSVALID

TSD7

TSD6

TSD5

TSD4

TSD3

TSD2

TSD1

TSD0

TPA

TPBIAS

XTPA

TPB

XTPB

E DATA13

E DATA14

E DATA15

AU

D1

VIC

TO

AIF

AU

D1

AIF

TO

VIC

FRO

MR

EC

OR

DE

R S

EC

TIO

N-3

IC23

01 (

3/3)

EXT P DETTSD0 to 7

TSCLKTDIR

TSSYNCTSVALID


CN2400XTPBTPB

XTPATPA

1234

Q2104

LRCK

WCK

AUD1 VIC TO AIF

AUD1 AIF TO VIC

AIF/DA SO

AIF

CS

AIF

/DA

SC

LK

RE

C M

UTE

XP

DI

AMCK

Q803

Q804

SP −

SOUND

SP +

Q750Q851

AA2.7V

AVDDDVDDTVDDMVDDSVDDHVDD

P5VAA4.6V

ADV/EXTMIC RADV MIC L

ADV/EXTMIC REXT L

AUD1 VIC TO AIF

SP +SP −

HDV/DV JACK

AUDIOI/F

CONTROLLER

CONTROLREGISTER

I/F

HPFFIL1FIL2EQ

FIL3

+2dbto

−2db

−24db+12db

0db

OFFSETCANCEL

HPF

MIXER&

DEM

OFFSETCANCEL

HPFADC

PRE AMP

PRE AMP

SPK AMPALC2

MIXDAC OPGA

ALC1

LINE OUT

HP AMP

OVFDETECT

MICPOWER

Q855

Q801

Q852

Q802

Q853

Q854

Q805

Q806

AVDD2.7V

CN701INT MIC RINT MIC L

42



TOTOP COVER ASS'Y


MAIN PCB(7/10)

RECORDER SECTION-2


HV20 E

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL

USB SIGNAL

CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL

DIGITAL ( IMAGE+AUDIO SIGNAL)

DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL

DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL

ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL

TORECORDER SECTION-2IC2301 (2/3)

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNALTORECORDER SECTION-2IC2301 (2/3)

SERVICE CONNECTORX

FB R

D/P

IO

SI(

2)/P

IO

PIO

(2)

TCLK

/PI

PIO

(1)

AIN

(15)

AIN

(9)

AIN

(14)

AIN

(4)

RFG

T/P

I

RFG

S/P

I

PWMD

PWMC

CFG

DPG

DFG

XFB IOW/PIO

XEINT50/PIO

TX/PIO

RX/PIO

UAT CLKO/PIO

XECS(5)/PIO

AIN(7) K26

AIN(8) G23

XECS(44)/PIO

IC2301(3/3)MB87Q1211BGL-GE1

VIC HDV

AA1

E5

B7

A7

AF5

Y3

XEINT54/PIO AG3

AC8

AF12

AF9

AE9

AB8

AG10

AC7

AB6

AC6

A10

CA

PD

IR/P

IOL2

2

CD

ATA

(2)/

PIO

D26

AF3

AG

21

F15

AF2

5

H25 J25

E23

H23

L23

M25

M22

N26

M23

N22

N25

AG6

PIO(3)AG25

AE10

AC9

AG12

AF2

AC10

AC11

AE11

AB10

AF11

2

17

21

1

6

34

32

35

3029 13 232226258281211

42

43

45

46

36 385

A9

F1

F2

F3

G9

F8

F7

F9

E8

G7

G8

G2

H9

G3

H1

H2

H3

J2

J3

J7

J8

H8

H7

A2

B1

B2

C1

C2

D1

D2

E1

E9

D8

D9

C8

C9

B8

B9

A8

A7

D3

C7

J9

E7

B3

IC2307K4M64163PK-BG75

SDRAM

AG13

AF13

AE13

AC13

AB13

AG14

AF14

AE14

AC14

AG15

AF15

AE15

AC15

AG16

AF16

AE16

AC23

AC22

AC21

AB21

AC20

AE20

AG20

AB19

AC19

AE19

AF19

AG19

AC18

AE18

AC16

AG17

AF17

AE17

AB17

AC17

AG18

AB16

A18

C19

B19

A19

C21

ADATA(0)

ADATA(1)

ADATA(2)

ADATA(7)

ADATA(3)

C20

B20

A20

ADATA(4)

ADATA(5)

ADATA(6)

B25

A27

E21

E22

F22

BDATA(0)

BDATA(1)

BDATA(2)

BDATA(7)

BDATA(3)

E26

E27

F21

BDATA(4)

BDATA(5)

BDATA(6)

A25

A24

F26

VCLK

HD VD

CCLK

A21

B22

A22

HD DOTCLK

OSD VD

OSD HD

C23

B23

A23

C24

OSD DATA(0)

OSD DATA(1)

OSD DATA(2)

OSD DATA(3)

E17

B16 AUD6 I /PIO

AUD3 O/PIO

C16

C17

E18

AUD4 O/PIO

AUD3 I /PIO

AUD4 I /PIO

F18 AUD5 I /PIO

U6 EADDR(24)/PIO

AF21

G26

PIO(4)

CDATA(6)/PIO

G27 CDATA(7)/PIO

D1

E2

D2

C3

B4

STDATA(0)

STDATA(1)

STDATA(2)

STDATA(7)

STDATA(3)

B3

A3

C4

STDATA(4)

STDATA(5)

STDATA(6)

A4

A5 STREQ

B14 VCLK O

AB1 XSDR CAS/PIO

AB2 XECS(40)/PIO

R26 PWM(2)/PIO

STCLK

A6

B6

C6

STEN

STSTART

STEND

AD2 XEINT53/PIO

Y1

AC2

AA2

XECS(45)/PIO

EXT RDY40/PIO

XEINT52/PIO

AE2 XEINT0/PI

AA5 XECS(1)/PIO

AF23DEBCLK

AD27

AE24

AE23

XDEBEN

DEBUD

DEBDD

1

24

IC2306TC7SZ32AFE

OR GATE

K2A1

J6A2

K6A3

J5A4

K5A5

K3A6/ALE

C1D1/AD1

B1D0K10 VBUS

H10 DM

J10 DP

K7 INT N

A3 RD N

B2 WR1 N

A1 CS N

A4 DACK1 N

H9 AFED33V−1

K9 AFED33V−2

K8 RST N

A2 WR0 N

C2D2/AD2

D1D3/AD3

D2D4/AD4

D3D5/AD5

E1D6/AD6

E2D7

F1D8

F2D9

G1D10

G2D11

G3D12

H1D13

H2D14

J2D15

IC3500RBA01013LG

USB IC

J4 AFED33V−3

H5 VIFA1

E3 VIFA2

C6 VIFB1

F8 VIFB2

F3 VDD1

C5 VDD2

E8 VDD3

J7 AFEA15V

USB XINT0

XERD M

XEWRU M

XEWRL M

USB XCS

MAIN PCB(8/10)

H1B6

CN2000H1A

5

H2A 3H2B 2

CH-1HEAD

DRUMUNIT

CH-2HEAD





GDH CONT

EQ CONT

GDL CONT

RAGC

RAPC

EQFC

RCLK

XRCLK

RAFC

UTIL SWP(0)

UTIL SWP(2)

UTIL SWP(1)

RAGC

RAPC

UTIL SWP(3)

RCLK

XRCLK

UTIL SWP(4)

UTIL SWP(5)

REC H

SWP

VRH7

VRL7

PBRF

XRDAT

PB H

RDAT H1A

H1B

H2A

H2B

XR

CLK

RC

LK

RA

PC

RA

GC

EQ

FC

RA

FC

EQ

CO

NT

GD

L C

ON

T

GD

H C

ON

T

Q2000

XDEBENDEBUDDEBDD

DEBCLKMTOV EN

MTOV DATANTSC XPALVTOM DATAVTOM SCKVTOM CS

MACS CAM MODEFCH 0

VTR POW SWCAM POW SWTX SDA(I2C)TX SCL(I2C)

SHOE ID2SHOE ID1

EVF HDEVF BEVF GEVF R

EVF COM DCEVF COM AC

V I /O/HP R

MTOV EN

VTOM DATA

MTOV DATA

VTOM SCK

NTSC XPAL

SHOE ID1

SHOE ID2

MACS CAM MODE

VTOM CS

V I /O/HP RVTR POW SWCAM POW SW

FCH 0EVF HD

EVF COM DCEVF COM AC

MIC2MIC3

EVF BEVF GEVF RSWPPBRF

VTR UNREG

B1B3B5B6B4A1A3A5A6A8A9

A10B8

B10A4

CN2900

LMO

FR

BH

LMO

FR

BL

CA

P F

RB

H

CA

P F

RB

L

CA

P O

N

RE

C P

RO

OF

TAP

E L

ED

TAP

E T

OP

TAP

E E

ND

MS

W A

D

DE

W A

D

TRE

EL

SR

EE

L

DERR

CERR

CFG

DPG

DFG

REEL LED CONT

DRUM ON



HA4.6VVTR UNREG

HA3V

REC CONT RECON

EPH

PB ON

IC2000LD502W

VRP2

EQ VCO

GCA

GDL

REC PROOFREEL LED CONT

TAPE TOPTAPE END

TREELSREEL

TAPE LEDLMO FRBLLMO FRBH

CAP ONMSW ADDEW AD

DERRCERRCFGDPGDFG

CAP FRBLCAP FRBHDRUM ON

SDRAM1.8V

VDDQ1

VDDQ4

VDDQ3

VDD3

VDD2

VDDQ2

VDD1

ADDR(13)

ADDR(12)

ADDR(11)

ADDR(10)

ADDR(9)

ADDR(8)

ADDR(7)

ADDR(6)

ADDR(5)

ADDR(4)

ADDR(3)

ADDR(2)

ADDR(1)

ADDR(0)

MDATA(14)

MDATA(15)

MDATA(13)

MDATA(12)

MDATA(11)

MDATA(10)

MDATA(9)

MDATA(8)

MDATA(7)

MDATA(6)

MDATA(5)

MDATA(4)

MDATA(3)

MDATA(2)

MDATA(1)

MDATA(0)

UDQM

CLK

CKE

CS

RAS

CAS

WE

LDQM

DQMU

MCLK

CKE

XCS

XRAS

XCAS

XWE

DQML

BA0

BA1

A11

A10

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0

DQ15

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

DQ8

DQ9

DQ10

DQ11

DQ12

DQ13

DQ14

DQMU

MCLK

MCKE

XCS

XRAS

XCAS

XWE

DQML

M ADD0

M ADD1

M ADD2

M ADD3

M ADD4

M ADD5

M ADD6

M ADD7

M ADD8

M ADD9

M ADD10

M ADD11

M ADD12

M ADD13

M DATA15

M DATA14

M DATA13

M DATA12

M DATA11

M DATA10

M DATA9

M DATA8

M DATA7

M DATA6

M DATA5

M DATA4

M DATA3

M DATA2

M DATA1

M DATA0VIC A DATA0

VIC A DATA1

VIC A DATA2

VIC A DATA3

VIC A DATA4

VIC A DATA5

VIC A DATA6

VIC A DATA7

VIC B DATA0

VIC B DATA1

VIC B DATA2

VIC B DATA3

VIC B DATA4

VIC B DATA5

VIC B DATA6

VIC B DATA7

27M

CCLK

VIC HD DOTCLK

VIC OSD VD

VIC OSD HD

VIC HD VD

VIC OSD DATA0

VIC OSD DATA1

VIC OSD DATA2

VIC OSD DATA3

AUD1 VIC TO MACS

AUD2 VIC TO MACS



AUD1 TRIP TO VIC

AUD2 TRIP TO VIC

TRIPLETS BASIL XRESET

WIDE CONT

LET CONT

MUTE D

ST DATA0

ST DATA1

ST DATA2

ST DATA3

ST DATA4

ST DATA5

ST DATA6

ST DATA7

ST CLK

ST EN

ST START

ST END

ST REQ

BASIL CS

TRIPLETS RDY

TRIPLETS INT1

TRIPLETS INT2

MACS CS

MACS INT

XDEBEN

DEBUD

DEBDD

DEBCLK

VIC A DATA0 to 7VIC B DATA0 to 7

VIC OSD DATA0 to 327M

CCLKVIC HD DOTCLK

VIC OSD VDVIC OSD HDVIC HD VD

ST DATA0 to 7ST CLKST EN

ST STARTST ENDST REQ

WIDE CONTLET CONT

MUTE DTRIPLETS BASIL XRESET

TRIPLETS CSBASIL CS

TRIPLETS RDYTRIPLETS INT1TRIPLETS INT2


AUD1 TRIP TO VICAUD2 TRIP TO VIC

X2300

1 3

TRIPLETS CS 0

TRIPLETS CS GATE



AUD1 VIC TO MACSAUD2 VIC TO MACS

MACS CSMACS INT


XRESETUSB XINT0USB XCSXERD M

XEWRU MXEWRL M

EDATA M DATA 0

EDATA M DATA 1

EDATA M DATA 2

EDATA M DATA 3

EDATA M DATA 4

EDATA M DATA 5

EDATA M DATA 6

EDATA M DATA 7

EDATA M DATA 8

EDATA M DATA 9

EDATA M DATA 10

EDATA M DATA 11

EDATA M DATA 12

EDATA M DATA 13

EDATA M DATA 14

EADDR M ADD 5

EADDR M ADD 4

EADDR M ADD 3

EADDR M ADD 2

EADDR M ADD 1

EADDR M ADD 0

EDATA M DATA 15

DVDD2.7V

USB 3.2V

DVDD1.4V

D+D−

VBUS

RECORDER SECTION-3


HV20 E

CPU BUS SIGNAL

M7 PVDD5 B

M6 PVDD6 B

B4 AVDD2

N7 PVDD5 A

L6 AVDD1

N6 PVDD6 A

A8

28

C4

PVDD1 A

H1 PVDD2 A

M1 PVDD3 A

SEL1

J11 OUTC11

N11 OUT11

L11 AVDD3

K11 CHRG CTL1

M11 CHRG CTL2

A2 VBATT

F11 CS2

L4 /RST

F3 RST OUT2

A4 VOUT2

C1

D2 CS OUT2

CS OUT1

B5 VOUT3

L5 LD

J3 CLK

G11 CTL7

A5 VOUT4

H3 DOUT

A3 VOUT1

G3 DIN

A9 PVDD4 A

L1 PVDD3 B

M12 + INC11

L12 − INC11

H2 PVDD2 B

B8 PVDD1 B

B9 PVDD4 B

5 VIN

1

CONT

4VOUT

IC3260NJM2877F3-32

3.2V REGULATOR

5 VIN 4VOUTIC3261


IC3300MB44A127PV3-G-E1

SUB POWER IC

26FB1

31FB2

30

22

2 VCC

3 CTL

24 VCCO− INE2

OUT2

27

23

− INE1

OUT1

5 VIN 4VOUTIC3310

NJM2881F055.0V REGULATOR

C6

A10

B10

K2

N5

C5

A7

B7

J1

G1

K1

N2

J2

N8

M2

G2

M8

M5

L9 VB

C4 SEL1

L10 PVDD10

L8 DVDD1

IC3200MB44C014

MAINPOWER IC

L2

D1

E11

L7VREF1

F12

G12

C9

C11

B13

C13

G13

F13

D11

C10

E13

D13

N10VOUT10

D12

C7CTL

M10

CS1

B3SW OUT

TOCIRCUITPROTECTION

H11 CTL9 (CH9 ON/OFF)

CTL10 (CH10 ON/OFF)

B12

A12

C12

C2SW CTL1

MAIN PCB (9/10)

FU3201

FU3200

FU3202

FU3203

1.8V (CH4)

HDMI1.8V

SDRAM1.8V

DVDD1.8V

1.2V (CH1) TRIPLETS1.2V

4.9V (CH6)

1.5V (CH2)

2.8V (CH3)

1.8V (CH5)

−1.35V (CH8)

MACS SDRAM1.8V

AFE1.8V

VTR UNREG

DRUM CAP POW

FU1900SHOE UNREG

FU500ST UNREG

DVDD2.7V

SENS−1.35V

AVDD2.7V

AA2.7V

AVDD1.2VLPF

VICX1.2VLPF

AVDD1.4V

AA4.6V

HDMI3.2V

AVDD3.2V

HA4.6V

AVDD4.6V

LCD5VLPF

EVF2.7V

LPF

LPF

MACS1.2V

DVDD1.4V

P5V

D3280

LCD8.5V (CH10)

LCD BL (CH9)

LCD 8.5V

LCD BL POWD3290

DC J DETDC V DETDC V A/D

A/D ICHG CTL1CHG CTL2

VBATTB RESET

E3+LICCM RESET

E3VB E3DET

IC3201 CSLIC3201 VTOM CLK

IC3201 MTOV DATAIC3201 VTOM DATA

E1.4VLI POW

CAM MINUS1.2 ONVTR ON

LCD BL ONSUB SCP OFFVTR ON SUB

BATT A/DBATT TEMP

LCD BL VFB

BATT TEMPBATT +BATT +BATT −BATT −


Q1801

D3203

4 3 2 1

5 6 7 8

2

1 3

45Q1802FU1800

A/D I

CHG CTL1

CHG CTL2

VBATT

B RESET

E3+LI

CCM RESET

B E3DET

E3V

IC3201 CSL

IC3201 VTOM CLK

IC3201 MTOV DATA

LCD CAM ON

LI POW

IC3201 VTOM DATA

E1.4V

D3200P5V

E1.4V

E3V

DVDD1.4V

Q1800

Q3450

TOBATTERY TERMINAL

CN3200

DC JACK

CN320135421

2

1 3

45

Q33203.0V (SUB 2)

AVDD3V

2

1 3

45

Q33105.35V (SUB 1)

CAM5.3V

P5.15V

HA3V

USB3.2V

LCD3.0V

STROBE3V

HDMI5V


OSC

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH6

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH5

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH1

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH2

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH4

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH3

PWMLogicCTL

LogicCTL

DRV

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

PWMLogicCTL

DRV

CH7

CH8

CH9

POWERON/OFF

CTL

CH1∼6

POWER SUPPLY SECTION


HV20 E

Power f rom Battery

Power f rom DC JACK

Battery charge


3 4

3 4

CVF PCB

LCD(CVF)

CVF FPC MAIN PCB(10/10)

EVF VDDEVF VSSGEVF HST

EVF HCK2EVF HCK1EVF NRWEVF REF

EVF XSTBEVF VSTEVF VCKEVF ENBEVF PCG

EVF BEVF REVF G

EVF PSIGEVF COM AC

AVDD2.7VP GY OUTY GY OUT

CN4101222120191817161514131211109876124

LCD/EEP SCLKLCD/EEP SO

C SYNCNMF CCW SW

KEY AD3NMF CW SW

PANEL BT SWLCD BL VFB

LCD ONLCD EEP SIN VLCD EEP CS V

LCD CSLCD5V

LCD3.0VPANEL BPANEL RPANEL GKEY AD3KEY AD4

PANEL OPEN SWLCD8.5VLCD3.0V

LCD BL POWLCD BL POW

CN90013142112359

111215161920242526282931171867

VDDVSSGHST

HCK2HCK1NRWREF

XSTBVSTVCKENBPCGBLUERED

GREENPSIGCOM

CN4102134568

1011121314151617181920

Q1503SWITCH

Q1502

Q1901

EVF2.7V

LCD5V

EVF GEVF REVF B

EVF COM ACEVF COM DC

VF R EVFVF G EVFVF B EVFEVF HDC SYNC

LCD/EEP SCLKLCD/EEP SO

EVF SENEVF 3V ONEVF 5V ONSHOE ONSHOE ID1SHOE ID2

DIRECTPRINT LEDMF CCW SWMF CW SW

PANEL BT SWLCD ON

LCD EEP SIN VLCD EEP CS V

LCD CSVF G LCDVF B LCDVF R LCDKEY AD2KEY AD3KEY AD4

ST VDHGL(1)PANEL OPEN SW

P GY OUTY GY OUTST TMG 1ADV MIC L

ADV/EXT MIC R

LCD BL VFB

EVF COM ACEVF HCK1EVF HCK2

EVF GEVF REVF B

EVF PCGEVF PSIGEVF ENBEVF VCKEVF VST

EVF XSTBEVF REFEVF HSTEVF NRW

EVF8.5V(EVF VDD)EVF VSSG

EVF BL2.7VEVF BL2.7VAVDD2.7V

P5VP5V

SHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SW

P GY OUTY GY OUT

DIRECTPRINT LEDKEY AD2

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC LSHOE ID2ST TMG 1

ST VDHGL(1)SHOE ID1

CN1501253738272829302631323334353936414044452043194321

2123181715141211109

IC1501CXM3017TQCVF DRIVER

46B/B-Y

44G/Y

45R/R-Y

7

8SDAT

5VCC1-1

18

6

14

35

15

38

39

33

16 NRW

36 VCC2

41 DA OUT

26 POF

42 REF

20 XSTB

24 VST

23 VCK

22 EN

37 PSIG OUT

19

34

43

PCG

B OUT

G OUT

R OUT

HCK2

HCK1

EVF NRW17 HST

EVF HST

EVF REF

EVF XSTB

EVF VST

EVF VCK

EVF ENB

EVF PSIG

EVF PCG

EVF B

EVF G

EVF R

EVF HCK2

EVF HCK1COM OUT

COMDC

SCK

VDD1

29VDD2

VCC1-2

SEN

47SYNC IN

27HDO

P5VSHOE UNREGAVDD2.7V

LCD8.5V

ZD1501



Q1501

Q1504

VF R EVF

VF G EVF

VF B EVF

EVF HD

10XCLR

C SYNC

LCD/EEP SCLK

LCD/EEP SO

EVF SEN

AVDD2.7V

VCC OUT

IC1691ENC-03RC-02

P SENSOR GYRO

AVDD 2.7V

VCC OUT

IC1692ENC-03RD-02

Y SENSOR GYRO

AVDD 2.7V


EVF COM ACEVF PSIG

EVF GEVF REVF B

EVF PCGEVF ENBEVF VCKEVF VST

EVF XSTBEVF REFEVF NRWEVF HCK1EVF HCK2EVF HST

EVF VSSGEVF 8.5V

SHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SWSHOE UNREG SW

SHOE ID1ST VDHGL(1)

ST TMG 1SHOE ID2ADV MIC L

ADV/EXT MIC RKEY AD2

DIRECTPRINT LEDP5VP5V

EVF BL2.7VEVF BL2.7V

CN100202123252627282930313233343536373839404112349

1011121415171819434445


EVF COM AC(COM)PSIG

EVF GEVF REVF BPCGENBVCKVST

XSTBREFNRWHCK1HCK2HST

VSSGEVF 8.5V(VDD)

CN1021246789

10111213141516171819202122

Q1503SWITCH

SHOE UNREG

SW101DIRECTPRINT

SW100DISP

LED100

ZD100

LED4101

Q4101

ZD4101


LCD BL POWLCD3.0VLCD8.5V

TOLCD PCB, FOCUS DIAL, LCD FPC ASS'Y SECTIONLCD FPC ASS'YCN1

TOPOWER SUPPLY SECTIONMAIN PCB

CVF SECTION


HV20 E

DATA COMMUNICATION

4VOUT5 VIN

IC903NJM2877F3-28

2.8V REGULATOR

1

CONT

LCSECSSO

SOCLK

LCD3.0V

LCD8.5V

1

8VCC2

3

4

E CS

CLK

SO

SO

LCD3.0V

WP4201

DI

DO

BACK LIGHT LED

R/R-Y

IC901CXM3017TQLCD DRIVER

6

26

46

42

38

37

3618 29

5

43

13

14

15

16

17

19

20

21

22

23

8

7

44

45

33

35

34

GREEN

CN902

BLUEVSTVCKEN

2

1124

7

61

89

12

13141920

2122

35

RED 4

L CS

CLK

SO

SEN

G/Y

B/B-Y

SCK

SDAT

47 SYNC IN

VC

C2

VD

D2

VD

D1

VCC1-1

PO

F

VCC1-2

VCK

24VST

EN

G OUT

R OUT

B OUT

DWN

XSTB

PCG

HST

NRW

HCK2

HCK1

RGT

REF

COMDC

PSIG OUT

DWNXSTBY

PCGHSTNRWHCK2HCK1RGTREF

LCD COM AC(COM1)

COM223CS

PSIG18VDD15VSSG

LCD UNIT

CS

SK

CN901LCD5V

LCD8.5VLCD3.0VLCD3.0VLCD ON

LCD BL POWLCD BL POWLCD BL VFB

PANEL RPANEL GPANEL BLCD CS

LCD EEP CS VLCD/EEP SO

LCD/EEP SCLKLCD EEP SIN V

C SYNCKEY AD3KEY AD4

1416131522262724759

17181920211232

CN1LCD BL POWLCD BL POWLCD BL VFB

LCD ONLCD EEP SIN VLCD/EEP SCLK

LCD/EEP SOLCD EEP CS V

LCD CSLCD8.5VLCD3.0VLCD5V

LCD3.0VC SYNCPANEL BPANEL RPANEL GKEY AD3KEY AD4

MF CCW SWKEY AD3

MF CW SWPANEL BT SW

PANEL OPEN SW

679

111213141516171819202124252628291235

31

CN1MF CCW SW

KEY AD3MF CW SW

543

LCD8.5V

Q903

Q901

XCLR10

Q902

39COM OUT

ZD4201

LCD3.0V

ZD901

CN2LCD BL POWLCD PL POWLCD BL VFB

LCD ONLCD EEP SIN VLCD/EEP SCLK

LCD/EEP SOLCD EEP CS V

LCD CSLCD8.5VLCD3.0VLCD5V

LCD3.0VC SYNK

PANEL BPANEL RPANEL GKEY AD3KEY AD4

272624222120191817161514131297532

CN3MF CCW SW

KEY AD3MF CW SW

543

SW2PANEL OPEN SW

SW1PANEL BT SW

E1

MF DIAL

E2

ZD50

SW52

SW51FA SW

SW50MF SW

CN50REW

FFPLAYSTOP

5432

TOCVF SECTIONMAIN PCBCN900

TOLCD KEY ASS'Y

IC902BR9010RFV-W

EEPROM

LCD PCB

LCD

LCD FPC ASS'Y

FOCUS DIAL ASS'Y

LCD PCB, FOCUS DIAL, LCD FPC ASS'Y SECTION


HV20 E

ANALOG IMAGE SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL

Q503

T501

V0

VCC

IC501TPS65560RGT

DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

LED10

10

1SW1

2SW2

CHG

15 VBAT

6 I PEAK

3 VCC

41

2

IC502TC7SET08FU(F)

CMOS IC

1

2

FRONT COVER ASS'Y

MIC JACK

COMPONENT JACK

CN701

AV JACK

TORECORDER SECTION-1MAIN PCBCN2800

CN10

CN20135679

YPBPR

DET1DET3D DET

CP502

TO TRIGER COIL

TO XENON

CP501

Q502

Q501

P5VP5VST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGST UNREGSTROBE3VST EFCHG

ST TMGST TMG ONST VDHGLAV L/HP LV I /O/HP R

AV JACK DETAV REXT L


YPBPR

D ID1D ID3D DET

RMC INWHITE LED

BARRSW OPENBARRSW LED

BARRSW CLOSEBARRMO OUT3(B)

BARRMO OUT4(B− )BARRMO OUT1(A)

BARRMO OUT2(A− )

CN501332930313234262728256985321

191715131211353637383940414243

CN100327685

119

10121

RMC INWHITE LED

BARRSW OPENBAR LED CLBAR LED OP

BARRSW CLOSEBARRMO OUT3(B)

BARRMO OUT4(B− )BARRMO OUT1(A)

BARRMO OUT2(A− )P5V

CN50221

XE(+)XE(− )

CN50321

T(+)T(− )

P5V

BARRMO OUT3BARRMO OUT4BARRMO OUT1BARRMO OUT2

BAR LED OPBARRSW OPEN

BAR LED CLBARRSW CLOSE

WHITE LEDP5V

RMC IN

CN100

RU100

119

10128765213

CP100CP102CP101CP103

PS101PS100

P5V RMC

REMOTE CONTROLER

JACK PCB

JACK PCB, FRONT COVER ASS'Y SECTION


HV20 E

USB SIGNAL

TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN PCBCN102

SP +SP −

CARD DAT2CARD DAT3CARD CMDDVDD2.7VCARD CLK

CARD DAT0CARD DAT1CARD DETKEY AD1KEY AD0

H PHOTO SWPHOTO SW

CAM POW SWCAM POW LEDVTR POW SWT/C POW SW

START STOP SWP.AE/GREEN SW

ZOOM ADAVDD2.7VDVDD2.7V

VBUSD−D+

ACCESS & CHARGE LEDVTR UNREG

LI RESETLI POW2

CN104191723679

1214153325222426272830313537202938404232344321

HPDSDASCL

CLOCK−CLOCK+

D0−D0+D1−D1+D2−D2++5V+5V

CN1025689

11121415171834

HOT PLUG DETECTSDASCL

TMDS CLOCK−TMDS CLOCK+TMDS DATA0−TMDS DATA0+TMDS DATA1−TMDS DATA1+TMDS DATA2−TMDS DATA2+

+5V POWER

CN151916151210976431

18

TOSYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONMAIN PCBCN102

TORECORDER SECTION-1MAIN PCBCN2830

CN1019124578

12

DAT2CD/DAT3

CMDVDDCLK

DAT0DAT1

CARD DET

CN100161518111720654

1431

121087

13

KEY AD0 CKEY AD0 LKEY AD0 R

KEY AD1 FUNCKEY AD1 DKEY AD1 U

H PHOTO SWPHOTO SW

CAM POW SWCAM POW LEDVTR POW SW

TAPE/CARD SWSTART/STOP SWP.AE/GREEN SW

ZOOM ADAVDD2.7VDVDD2.7V

CN102123

VBUSD−D+

SPEAKER

CN10321

SP +SP −

SW100

LED100

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONMAIN PCBCN101

SW100EJECT SW

USB JACK

TOCASSETTE COVER ASS'Y

miniSD CARD

HDMI JACK

REAR PCB

HDMI FPC ASS'Y

CARD PCB

CARD,REAR PCB, HDMI FPC ASS'Y SECTION


HV20 E

No.D16-2016, D16-2015 Digital Video Camera

HV20 EHV20 E

CANON INC. 2007c

Canon Inc.Digital Imaging Products Service

& Quality Assurance Dept.First Edition : Mar. 2007

First Print : Mar. 2007

R2:CONFIDENTIAL

iPAL

Video Product

1

1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other parts.Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.

2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3203 only with same TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE, replace FU500, FU1900, FU3200, FU3201, FU3202 only with same TYPE : 494001,1.0A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.

3. For continued protection against risk of product damage or personal injury, replace FU1800 only withsame TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.

CAUTION

2

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Casing Parts Section-1

13×4

1×3

7×2

1×3

5×2

1×2

7×2

3×4

3×2

12111

9

1

10

1

3

14

7

6

2

4

1

18

Front Cover Unit

R-LCD Unit

3

MECHANICAL PARTS

SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 13 SCREW2 XA9-1772-000 000 F 1 SCREW3 XA1-7170-407 000 F 7 SCREW4 DA3-5743-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK NEW5 XA9-1706-000 000 F 2 SCREW

6 DA3-5736-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW7 XA4-9170-557 000 F 5 SCREW8 XA9-0610-000 000 C 1 SCREW9 DA3-5842-000 000 B 1 EYECUP NEW

10 DA3-5787-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK, TOP NEW

11 DG3-1861-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, TOP NEW12 DA3-2796-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY13 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW14 DA3-5856-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW

4

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG


1×2

1×2

1×2

1×2

3×3

1

19

10

11

7

2

1

4

3

56

1 1

112

1

13

14

8

7

a

a

Camera Unit

Recorder Unit

CVF BatteryCase Unit

5

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 17 SCREW2 DG3-1849-000 000 C 1 FLASH ASS’Y NEW3 XA9-1708-000 000 F 4 SCREW4 DG3-1845-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW5 DA3-5733-000 000 C 1 SPRING, HOOK NEW

6 DA3-5732-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CASSETTE NEW7 XA4-9170-407 000 F 2 SCREW8 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW9 DA3-5759-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK NEW

10 DG3-1839-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CARD NEW

11 WK1-5164-000 000 C 1 BATTERY, LITHIUM <2ND>12 DH2-5671-000 000 C 1 FPC, CARD NEW13 DA3-5739-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW14 DA3-5741-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK, REAR NEW

6

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG


14×2

1×2 1×2

1×3

78

1514

13

12

9 10 11

65

42

3

16

117

18

7

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA9-1663-000 000 F 8 SCREW, MACH.,PAN HEAD2 DG3-1836-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK NEW3 DH9-3062-000 000 C 1 CAPACITOR, AL-EL, 330V 100UF NEW4 DA3-5869-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, BOTTOM NEW5 DA3-5745-000 000 C 1 FRAME, BOTTOM NEW

6 XA1-7170-307 000 F 1 SCREW7 DH2-5670-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK NEW8 DY1-9104-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW9 DA3-5868-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MAIN PCB NEW

10 DA3-5858-000 000 C 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW

11 DA3-5845-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAND NEW12 DG3-1842-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HDMI NEW13 DH2-5675-000 000 C 1 WIRE, REAR NEW14 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW15 DA3-1933-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GROUND

16 DG3-1840-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, REAR NEW17 DF1-5205-000 000 C 1 HOLDER ASS’Y, MAIN NEW18 DY1-8901-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC III(H)

8

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Front Cover Unit Section

1

2

3

4×3

9

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 DY1-9110-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT NEW2 DA3-5814-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND NEW3 DY1-9111-000 000 C 1 FOCUS DIAL ASS’Y NEW4 XA4-9170-407 000 F 3 SCREW

10

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

R-LCD Unit Section

1×2

3×2

11×2

1 2

9

3

6

1

8

5

4

710

14

13

12

LCD Unit

11

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA4-9170-407 000 F 4 SCREW2 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW3 XA1-7170-407 000 F 3 SCREW4 DA3-5777-000 000 B 1 PLATE, HEATSINK NEW5 WR1-5137-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER

6 DH2-5677-000 000 C 1 WIRE, SPEAKER NEW7 DA3-5784-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLIND NEW8 DA3-5779-000 000 C 1 WINDOW, LED NEW9 DA3-5738-000 000 B 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW

10 DA3-5770-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW

11 DA3-5785-000 000 C 2 CUSHION, LCD NEW12 DA3-5870-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LCD, GRAY NEW13 DA3-5773-000 000 B 1 LID, CARD NEW14 DA3-5774-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LID, CARD NEW

12

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

LCD Unit Section

1×2

13

14

12

11

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

5

2

a

a

13

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA1-7170-407 000 F 2 SCREW2 DY1-9108-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW3 DA3-5766-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND, LCD NEW4 DG3-1838-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW5 XA1-7170-257 000 F 1 SCREW

6 DA3-5767-000 000 C 1 INSULATOR, LCD NEW7 DG3-1671-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y

*1 8 DY1-9008-000 000 C 1 LCD, SELECTION*2 WG2-5301-000 000 C 1 LCD

9 DA3-5764-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD, B NEW

10 DG3-1846-000 000 C 1 KEY ASS’Y, LCD NEW11 DA3-5768-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE, T NEW12 DG3-1850-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW13 DA3-5769-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE, B NEW14 DG3-1843-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD NEW

*1 : Screened, dot-free units.

*2 : Same quality as the production line.

14

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

CVF Battety Case Unit Section

13×3

12×3

3×3

14

3

15

1617 18

5

2

16

78

910

11

19

20

213

3

2223

2425

2627

281

4

15

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW2 DG3-1844-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF NEW3 XA4-9170-507 000 F 6 SCREW4 DG3-1837-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW5 DA3-5823-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW

6 DA3-5827-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW7 DA3-5826-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF LCD NEW8 DA3-3813-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF PANEL 29 WG2-5297-000 000 C 1 LCD, CVF

10 DA3-5824-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, PANEL, CVF NEW

11 DA3-5843-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CASE, BATT NEW12 DA3-2455-000 000 C 3 TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW13 XA4-9170-357 000 F 3 SCREW14 DH2-5676-000 000 C 1 WIRE, TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW15 DA3-5830-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CASE, BATT NEW

16 DA3-5832-000 000 C 1 SPRING, BATT LOCK NEW17 DA3-5831-000 000 C 1 KNOB, LOCK, BATT NEW18 DA3-5737-000 000 C 1 KEY, RESET NEW19 DA3-5818-000 000 C 1 CASE, CVF, BATT NEW20 DA3-5833-000 000 B 1 BASE, SHOE NEW

21 DG3-0978-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASS’Y, AAS22 DA3-5771-000 000 C 1 KEY, RIGHT, TOP NEW23 DA3-5772-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, LED, KEY NEW24 DA3-5819-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW25 YN1-3901-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE

26 DA3-5821-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF DIOPTER NEW27 DA3-5110-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, CVF KNOB28 DA3-5820-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF NEW

16

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Camera Unit Section

Lens Unit

12×3

16×2

5×2

2×2

8

6

7

9

1011

15 16

13

14

3

1

4

17

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 DY1-9112-000 000 C 1 AUTO FOCUS ASS’Y NEW2 XA4-9170-557 000 F 2 SCREW3 DA3-3296-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, LENS4 DA3-5750-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS NEW5 XA4-9170-407 000 F 2 SCREW

6 DG3-1855-000 000 C 1 FRAME ASS’Y, TOP NEW7 XA9-0610-000 000 C 1 SCREW8 DH9-3057-000 000 C 1 FILTER, UV9 DA3-5675-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, CMOS SENSOR

10 DA3-6415-000 000 C 1 SPACER, LENS

11 DY1-9106-000 000 C 1 CMOS SENSOR ASS’Y NEW12 XA4-9170-507 000 F 3 SCREW13 DA3-5841-000 000 C 1 GASKET, TOP NEW14 DA3-5758-000 000 C 1 HEATSINK NEW15 DA3-5757-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK, REAR NEW

16 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW

18

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Lens Unit Section

(4)

1

(2)

(3)

(3)

(3)

19

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 DG3-2115-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW2 YH8-2056-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW3 XA4-9170-407 000 F 4 SCREW4 YB1-0405-000 000 F 1 SCREW

20

DMC IIIPARTS CATALOG

Mechanical Chassis Section-1

1

(10)

3

9

5

7

8

6

4

2

11

3×3

21

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW3 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW4 DY1-8610-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y5 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER

6 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y7 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)8 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW9 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE

10 DA3-2130-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING

11 DA1-9903-000 000 C 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS

22



23

4

5

6

7

8

6

1

9

10

13

11

12

23

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER2 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S3 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)4 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION5 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION

6 DA2-2139-000 000 C 2 WASHER7 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S8 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)9 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T

10 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT

11 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T12 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)13 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y

24



(2)×2

(2)×2

2×3

3 (8)

(9)

2(10)

11

12

15

13

(4)

(6)

(14)

(7)

(5)(1)

25

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING2 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW3 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y4 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S5 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T

6 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW7 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y8 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW9 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN

10 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW

11 DG3-1545-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH12 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER13 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)14 DA2-2128-010 000 C 1 GEAR, LOADING S15 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN

26



3

4

5

8

9

6

7

2

10

27

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DA2-2191-010 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW3 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING4 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY5 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT

6 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER7 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL8 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER9 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN

10 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM

28

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Accessory Section-1

N.S. (Product available)

BP-2L134

JAPANUSA

EUROPE

AUSTRALIA

CHINA

N.S. (Product available)

2

1

PLUG TYPE

MSDC-16M

N.S. (Commercially available.)

WL-D87(E)

CA-570

(5)

CB-2LW/CB-2LWEN.S.(Product available)

CB-2LT/CB-2LTEN.S. (Product available)

3

29

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE (CA-570)2 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, EUROPE

D82-0645-001 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, AUSTRALIAWT3-5087-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, CHINA

3 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L

4 D83-0752-000 000 B 1 WIRELESS CONTROLLER, WL-D87(E)5 DY1-8777-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM BATTERY

30

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

Accessory Section-2

WD-H43 TL-H43N.S. (Product available)N.S. (Product available)

2

1

2

1

FS-43U/43UIIN.S. (Product available)

N.S. (Product available)CTC-100/S

N.S. (Product available)DIF-100

N.S. (Product available)STV-250N

3

N.S. (Product available)IFC-300PCU

SS-900

31

MECHANICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

1 DA3-6849-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT, 74.5 NEW2 DA3-6850-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR, 49.5 NEW3 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS-900

32

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3203 ONLYWITH SAME TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32V FUSE, REPLACE FU500, FU1900, FU3200,FU3201, FU3202 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 494001, 1.0A-32V FUSE MANUFACTURER: LITTELFUSE.

- FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF PRODUCT DAMAGE OR PER-SONAL INJURY, REPLACE FU1800 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 49401.5, 1.5A-32VFUSE MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE.

FUSE Replacement Instruction

MAIN PCB

FU1800

FU1900

FU3201

FU3200

FU500

FU3202

FU3203

IC1612

IC3500

IC1102

IC1103

IC1100

IC101IC104

IC1613

IC2309

IC1611

IC100IC2830

IC2831

IC2833

IC3300

IC3260

IC3261 IC3200

IC1000

IC1200

IC102

IC105 IC107 IC106

IC103

IC108

IC109

33

ELECTRICAL PARTS


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

MAIN PCBFU500 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSE

FU1800 VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 FUSEFU1900 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSEFU3200 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSE

FU3201 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSEFU3202 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 FUSEFU3203 VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 FUSE

34

PARTS LIST

PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS

HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

29 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L31 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS-90029 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, EUROPE29 D82-0645-001 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, AUSTRALIA29 D83-0752-000 000 B 1 WIRELESS CONTROLLER, WL-D87(E)

21 DA1-9903-000 000 C 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS23 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER25 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW21 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW21 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)

25 DA2-2128-010 000 C 1 GEAR, LOADING S21 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW

21,23,25,27 DA2-2139-000 000 C 5 WASHER27 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER27 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL

27 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT27 DA2-2191-010 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM27 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM27 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN27 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING

27 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY23 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT23 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T25 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW25 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW

7 DA3-1933-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GROUND21 DA3-2130-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING15 DA3-2455-000 000 C 3 TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW3 DA3-2796-000 000 B 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY17 DA3-3296-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, LENS

15 DA3-3813-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF PANEL 215 DA3-5110-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, CVF KNOB17 DA3-5675-000 000 C 1 ABSORBER, CMOS SENSOR5 DA3-5732-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CASSETTE NEW5 DA3-5733-000 000 C 1 SPRING, HOOK NEW

3 DA3-5736-000 000 B 1 COVER, BOTTOM NEW15 DA3-5737-000 000 C 1 KEY, RESET NEW11 DA3-5738-000 000 B 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW5 DA3-5739-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW5 DA3-5741-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK, REAR NEW

3 DA3-5743-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK NEW7 DA3-5745-000 000 C 1 FRAME, BOTTOM NEW17 DA3-5750-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS NEW17 DA3-5757-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK, REAR NEW17 DA3-5758-000 000 C 1 HEATSINK NEW

5 DA3-5759-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK NEW13 DA3-5764-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD, B NEW13 DA3-5766-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND, LCD NEW13 DA3-5767-000 000 C 1 INSULATOR, LCD NEW13 DA3-5768-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE, T NEW

13 DA3-5769-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE, B NEW11 DA3-5770-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW15 DA3-5771-000 000 C 1 KEY, RIGHT, TOP NEW15 DA3-5772-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, LED, KEY NEW11 DA3-5773-000 000 B 1 LID, CARD NEW

11 DA3-5774-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LID, CARD NEW11 DA3-5777-000 000 B 1 PLATE, HEATSINK NEW11 DA3-5779-000 000 C 1 WINDOW, LED NEW11 DA3-5784-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLIND NEW11 DA3-5785-000 000 C 2 CUSHION, LCD NEW

35

PARTS LIST


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

3 DA3-5787-000 000 C 1 PLATE, HEATSINK, TOP NEW9 DA3-5814-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND NEW15 DA3-5818-000 000 C 1 CASE, CVF, BATT NEW15 DA3-5819-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW15 DA3-5820-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF NEW

15 DA3-5821-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF DIOPTER NEW15 DA3-5823-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW15 DA3-5824-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, PANEL, CVF NEW15 DA3-5826-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF LCD NEW15 DA3-5827-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW

15 DA3-5830-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CASE, BATT NEW15 DA3-5831-000 000 C 1 KNOB, LOCK, BATT NEW15 DA3-5832-000 000 C 1 SPRING, BATT LOCK NEW15 DA3-5833-000 000 B 1 BASE, SHOE NEW17 DA3-5841-000 000 C 1 GASKET, TOP NEW

3 DA3-5842-000 000 B 1 EYECUP NEW15 DA3-5843-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CASE, BATT NEW7 DA3-5845-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAND NEW3 DA3-5856-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW7 DA3-5858-000 000 C 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW

7 DA3-5868-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MAIN PCB NEW7 DA3-5869-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, BOTTOM NEW11 DA3-5870-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LCD, GRAY NEW17 DA3-6415-000 000 C 1 SPACER, LENS31 DA3-6849-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT, 74.5 NEW

31 DA3-6850-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR, 49.5 NEW25 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y25 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S25 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T23 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION

23 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION23 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y21 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y23 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S7 DF1-5205-000 000 C 1 HOLDER ASS’Y, MAIN NEW

25 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y25 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN25 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING25 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN23 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S

23 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T21 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE15 DG3-0978-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASS’Y, AAS25 DG3-1545-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH13 DG3-1671-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y

7 DG3-1836-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK NEW15 DG3-1837-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW13 DG3-1838-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW5 DG3-1839-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CARD NEW7 DG3-1840-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, REAR NEW

7 DG3-1842-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HDMI NEW13 DG3-1843-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD NEW15 DG3-1844-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF NEW5 DG3-1845-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW13 DG3-1846-000 000 C 1 KEY ASS’Y, LCD NEW

5 DG3-1849-000 000 C 1 FLASH ASS’Y NEW13 DG3-1850-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y NEW17 DG3-1855-000 000 C 1 FRAME ASS’Y, TOP NEW3 DG3-1861-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, TOP NEW19 DG3-2115-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW

36

PARTS LIST


HV20 EPARTS CATALOG

7 DH2-5670-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK NEW5 DH2-5671-000 000 C 1 FPC, CARD NEW7 DH2-5675-000 000 C 1 WIRE, REAR NEW15 DH2-5676-000 000 C 1 WIRE, TERMINAL, BATTERY NEW11 DH2-5677-000 000 C 1 WIRE, SPEAKER NEW

17 DH9-3057-000 000 C 1 FILTER, UV7 DH9-3062-000 000 C 1 CAPACITOR, AL-EL, 330V 100UF NEW25 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)23 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)23 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)

23 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)21 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE29 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE (CA-570)21 DY1-8610-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y29 DY1-8777-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM BATTERY

7 DY1-8901-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC III(H)*1 13 DY1-9008-000 000 C 1 LCD, SELECTION

7 DY1-9104-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW17 DY1-9106-000 000 C 1 CMOS SENSOR ASS’Y NEW13 DY1-9108-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW

9 DY1-9110-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT NEW9 DY1-9111-000 000 C 1 FOCUS DIAL ASS’Y NEW17 DY1-9112-000 000 C 1 AUTO FOCUS ASS’Y NEW

VD7-2241-001 000 C 5 FUSEVD7-2241-501 000 C 2 FUSE

15 WG2-5297-000 000 C 1 LCD, CVF*2 13 WG2-5301-000 000 C 1 LCD

5 WK1-5164-000 000 C 1 BATTERY, LITHIUM <2ND>11 WR1-5137-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER29 WT3-5087-000 000 C 1 CABLE, AC, CHINA

3 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW21,25,27 XA1-7140-147 000 C 3 SCREW

13 XA1-7170-257 000 F 1 SCREW3,5,7,15,17 XA1-7170-307 000 F 36 SCREW

3,11,13 XA1-7170-407 000 F 12 SCREW

15 XA4-9170-357 000 F 3 SCREW5,9,11,17,19 XA4-9170-407 000 F 15 SCREW

15,17 XA4-9170-507 000 F 9 SCREW3,5,11,17 XA4-9170-557 000 F 9 SCREW

3,17 XA9-0610-000 000 C 2 SCREW

7 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW7 XA9-1663-000 000 F 8 SCREW, MACH.,PAN HEAD3 XA9-1706-000 000 F 2 SCREW5 XA9-1708-000 000 F 4 SCREW3 XA9-1772-000 000 F 1 SCREW

19 YB1-0405-000 000 F 1 SCREW19 YH8-2056-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW15 YN1-3901-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE

canon hv20 e (ipal) parts list, service manual

Documents